construction of toilet blocks, drinking water facility and access … · 2018-03-01 ·...

Construction of Toilet blocks, Drinking Water Facility and access to disabled persons in the Centrally Protected monumentsunder ASI in Eastern, Central & Northern Regions in India

1

Construction of Toilet blocks, Drinking WaterFacility and access to disabled persons in theCentrally Protected monuments under ASI inEastern, Central & Northern Regions in India

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME-III

TCIL Bhawan, Greater Kailash – I, New Delhi - 110 048. IndiaPh: +91-11-26202020,


2

Construction of Toilet blocks, Drinking WaterFacility and access to disabled persons in theCentrally Protected monuments under ASI inEastern, Central & Northern Regions in India

INDEX

S.NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE

2. INTRODUCTION 3-4

3. PERTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS 5-5

4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 6-172

5. LIST OF APPROVED MAKES 173-177


3

INTRODUCTION

Archaeological Survey of India (ASI) intend Construction of Toilet Block &Drinking Water Facility and access to disabled persons including internalElectrification, Sanitary, Plumbing Works, and other Related Services in theCentrally Protected monuments under ASI in Eastern, Central & NorthernRegions in India.


4

NAME OF REGIONS / CIRLCES

S. No. Region Circle

I Central Region

Lucknow

Sarnath

Bhopal

Raipur

II Eastern Region

Bhubaneswar

Ranchi

Kolkata

Patna

Guwahati

Aizwal

III Northern Region

Agra

Chandigarh

Delhi

Delhi Mini Circle

Dehradun

J&K

Leh Mini Circle

Shimla


5

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

CIVIL WORKS

1. General : The work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with particularspecifications and drawings. The drawings, specifications BOQ etc. shall be takencomplementary and also supplementary to each other and shall form part this contract.Any work or material shown on drawings and not specifically included inBOQ/specification or vice versa shall be executed and deemed to be included in thescope of work for lumpsum rate. However, the steel for reinforcement work shall beTMT-BARS of Fe-415.

2. In case there are no specifications for items shown on the drawings or where items arenot exhaustively described, the general specifications of CPWD shall be followed forwhich nothing extra shall be paid. In case, no details are available even in CPWDspecification, then decision of owner/NBCC is final & binding on the contractor.

3. Scope of works : The scope of work for buildings under this contract includes for full &final and entire completion of all works including all internal and external services in allrespects described in particular specification Part-I and as shown on drawings formingpart of the contract.

4. Although all the details of construction have been by an large covered in thesedocuments, any item or details of construction not specifically covered but obviouslyimplied and essential to consider Civil works and all internal and external servicescomplete and functional, shall be deemed to have been covered in the lumpsum quoted.The cost of external development works pertaining to a particular contract shall also becarried out on a final lump sum price based on the rates quoted for each item. Thetenderer may however, consider a minimum level of specifications conforming to IS codeor National Building Code to cover any missing details.

5. Sample of Materials: The Contractor shall produce samples of all materials and shallobtain approval of these in writing from Architect/ Project Engineer before he places bulkorder for the materials for incorporation in the works. The samples must be producedatleast six week before they are to be incorporated in sample dwelling units. Materials tobe incorporated in the work shall conform to latest relevant ISI. The items should be ISImarked where manufactured.

6. Slopes : Adequate slope shall be provided in areas where there is likelihood of ingress ofwater such as toilets, balconies, verandah, kitchens, terraces, top of chajjas, window cills,plinth protections etc. though these may not be expressly shown in drawings.

7. Curing: Exposed surfaces of all cement works viz. cement concrete, brick work, flooring,plastering, pointing and the like shall be cured by keeping the surface adequately andcontinuously wet as directed by Architect and Project Engineer for at least seven dayswhere ordinary portland cement has been used. Approved curing compound may beused in lieu of moist curing with the permission of Architect and Project Engineer. Suchcompound shall be applied to all exposed surface of cement works as soon as possibleafter the initial setting of cement. This shall be without extra cost.


6


NON SCHEDULE ITEMS

CIVIL WORKS

1.1 Flush Pointing:

The joints shall be raked out properly. Dust and loose mortar shall be brushed out. Efflorescenceif any shall be removed by brushing and scraping. The surface shall then be thoroughly washedwith water, cleaned and kept wet before pointing is commenced.In case of concrete surface if a chemical retarder has been applied to the form work, the surfaceshall be roughened by wire brushing and all the resulting dust and loose particles cleaned off andcare shall be taken that none of the retarders is left on the surface.

The joints shall be raked to such a depth that the minimum depth of the new mortar measuredfrom either the sunk surface of the finished pointing or from the edge of the brick shall not be lessthan 12 mm.

The mortar shall be pressed into the joints and shall be finished off flush and level with theedges of the bricks, tiles or stones so as to give a smooth appearance. The edges shall be neatlytrimmed with a trowel and straight edge.

Flush pointing on exposed surface of Brick or Stone masonry surface with Lime, Surkhi andsand/stone dust mortar in the ratio of 1:1:1 {One lime : 1 Surkhi (100% dark red Surkhi) : 1sand/stone dust}.

1.2 Signage:

Signage is the design or use of signs and symbols to communicate a message to a specificgroup.Stainless Steel ( SS) alloy should be SS 304 grade. This offers excellent corrosion resistance andeffectively combats tarnishing under most circumstances.

Metal Etching( by Chemical Etching Machine) are most popular in corporate & Industries,because of its long life and impressive quality. \

Some features are:

Rust resistanceSturdyLong LifeAny Size / Accurate dimensionsAttractive lookCompact design

1.3 Stone:

All the stone work is carried out as per CPWD specification Volume I 2009. unless specified in thespecification & drawings.All required test of stone shall be as per Indian Standard (IS) codes.

1.3.1 Course Rubble ( CR) Stone Masonry - First Sort :

Stone shall be hard, sound, durable and free from weathering decay and defects like cavities,cracks, flaws, sand holes, injurious veins, patches of loose or soft materials and other similardefects that may adversely affect its strength and appearance. As far as possible stones shall beof uniform colour, quality or texture. Generally stone shall not contain crypst crystalline silica orchart, mica and other deleterious materials like iron-oxide organic impurities etc.


7

The stone shall be red or white or any other stone as specified in the description of item in theBOQ. The stone shall be hard, sound, tough, free from cracks, decay & weathering. In case ofred sand stone, white patches or streaks shall not be allowed. However scattered spots upto 10mm diameter will be permitted. Before starting the work the contractor shall get samples of stoneapproved by the Project-in-Charge.

Stones with round surface shall not be used.

Size of Stones:

Normally stones used should be small enough to be lifted and placed by hand. Unless otherwiseindicated, the length of stones for stone masonry shall not exceed three times the height and thebreadth on base shall not be greater than three-fourth of the thickness of wall, or not less than150 mm. The height of stone for rubble masonry may be upto 300 mm.

Dressing:

Every stone shall be dressed to the required size and shape chisel dressed on all beds and jointsso as to be free from waviness and to give truly vertical and horizontal joints.

In exposed masonry, the faces that are to remain exposed in the final position and the adjoiningfaces to a depth of 6 mm shall be the fine chisel dressed so that when checked with 60 cmstraight edge, no point varies from it by more than 1 mm.

The top and bottom faces that are to form the bed joints shall be chisel dressed so that variationfrom 60 cm straight edge at no point exceeds 3 mm. Faces which are to form the vertical jointsshould be chisel dressed so that variation at any point with 60 cm straight edge does not exceed6 mm.

Any vertical face that is to come against backing of masonry shall be dressed such that variationfrom straight edge does not exceed 10 mm. All angles and edges that are to remain exposed inthe final position shall be true, square and free from chippings.

A sample of dressed stone shall be prepared for approval of Project-in-Charge. It shall bekept at the worksite as a sample after being approved.

Mortar:

Mortar shall be use in cement mortar 1: 4 ( 1 cement : 4 Course sand) as as specified in thedescription of item in the BOQ.

Laying of Stone:

All stones shall be wetted before use. The walls shall be carried up truly plumb or to specifiedbatter. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical joints shall be truly vertical. Theheight of each course shall not be less than 15 cm nor more than 30 cm.

The walls and pillars shall be carried up truly plumb or battered as shown in drawings. All coursesshall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical joints shall be truly vertical.

Face stones shall be laid alternate headers and stretchers. No pinning shall be allowed on theface. No face stone shall be less in breadth than its height and at least one third of the stonesshall tail into the work for length not less than twice their height.

The hearting or the interior filling of the wall strictly is not allowed in any case of wall.

The masonry in a structure shall be carried up uniformly but where breaks are unavoidable, thejoints shall be raked back at angle not steeper than 45°. Toothing shall not be allowed.


8

Bond Stones :

Though bond stones shall be provided in walls upto 600 mm thickness, a set of two or more bondstones overlapping each other by at least 150 mm shall be provided in a line from face to back. Incase of highly absorbent types of stones (porous lime stone and sand stone etc.) the bond stoneshall extend about two-third into the wall, as through stones in such walls a set of two or morebond stones overlapping each other by at least 150 mm shall be provided. Each bond stone or aset of bond stonesshall be provided for every 0.5 m2 of the wall surface and shall be provided at 1.5 m to 1.8 mapart clear in every course.

Quoins:

The quoins shall be of the same height as the course in which these occur. These shall be atleast 450 mm long and shall be laid stretchers and headers alternatively. These shall be laidsquare on the beds, which shall be rough-chisel dressed to a depth of at least 100 mm. In case ofexposed work, these stones shall have a minimum of 25 mm wide chisel drafts at four edges, allthe edges being in the same plane.

Joints:

All bed joints shall be horizontal and all side joints vertical. All joints shall be fully packed withmortar, face joints shall not be more than one cm thick.

Pointing:

All exposed joints shall be pointed with mortar as specified. The pointing when finished shall besunk from stone face by 5 mm or as specified. The depth of mortar in pointing work shall not beless than 15 mm.


9

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONPLUMBING/SANITARY WORKS

1.0 GENERAL:

1.1 The work shall be carried out in the accordance with the drawings and design as wouldbe issued to the Contractor by the Design Consultant.

1.2 The work shall be executed and measured as per metric dimensions given in the Bill ofQuantities, drawings etc.

2 MEASUREMENTS:

All measurements shall be taken in accordance with relevant IS codes, unless otherwisespecified.

3. STANDARDS AND CODE OF PRACTICE

The work shall be carried out as per the enclosed Specifications of work and the constructiondrawings to be issued from time to time. These specifications shall be read in conjunction withCPWD specifications 1996, National Building Code (latest amendment), Relevant Codes ofPractices and Standards as issued by BIS (all with the latest amendments).

In case of any deviation, ambiguity, omissions, variations, confusion and dispute overspecification the consultants decision shall be final and binding on contractor. All the clause ofabove codes and specifications of sanitary installation, water supply, drainage & miscellaneousitems shall be applicable on the project and binding on the contract whether specificallymentioned in these specifications or not.

List of Indian Standards –

a) SP : 35 : 1987 – Hand Book on Water Supply & Drainage

b) Manual on Water Supply & Treatment

c) Manual on Sewerage & Sewage Treatment

d) IS : 651 – 1992 : S W Pipes and fittings

e) IS : 458 – 2003 : Precast concrete pipes

f) IS : 784 – 2001 : Pre stressed concrete pipes

g) IS : 780 – 1984 : Sluice valves for water works

h) IS : 783 – 1985 : Laying of Concrete pipes

i) IS : 1172 – 1993 : Basic requirement for water supply, drainage & sanitation

j) IS : 1239 (I & II) – 1982 : G I Pipes and fittings

k) IS : 2065 – 1983 : Water supply in buildings

l) IS : 1742 – 1983 : Building drainage

m) IS : 2800 – 1991 : Tubewells / Borewells

n) IS : 5329 – 1983 : Sanitary pipe work above ground

o) IS : 4127 – 1983 : Laying of S W Pipes

p) IS : 4985 – 2000 : UPVC pipes for water supply


10

q) IS : 15778 – 2007 : CPVC pipes for water supply

r) IS : 12592 – 2002 : Precast concrete manhole cover and frames

s) IS : 13592 – 1992 : UPVC pipes for soil, waste, vent pipes

t) IS : 10500 – 1991 : Drinking water specifications


11


WATER SUPPLY

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Any damage caused to the building, or to electric, sanitary water supply or otherinstallations etc. therein either due to negligence on the part of the contractor, ordue to actual requirements of the work, shall be made good and the building orthe installations shall be restored to its original condition by the contractor.

Nothing extra shall be paid for it, except where otherwise specified.

(b) All water supply installation work shall be carried out through licensed plumbers.

(c) It is most important to ensure that wholesome water supply provided for drinkingand culinary purposes, is in no way liable to contamination from any lesssatisfactory water. There shall, therefore, be no cross connection whatsoeverbetween a pipe or fitting for conveying or containing wholesome water and a pipeor fitting for conveying or containing impure water or water liable to contaminationor of uncertain quality of water which has been used for any purpose. Theprovision of reflux or non return valves or closed and sealed valves shall not beconstrued a permissible substitute for complete absence of cross-connection.

(d) No piping shall be laid or fixed so as to pass into, through or adjoining any sewer,scour outlet or drain or any manhole connected therewith nor through any ashpitor manure-pit or any material of such nature that would be likely to cause unduedeterioration of the pipe.

(e) Where the laying of any pipe through fouled soil or previous material isunavoidable, the piping shall be properly protected from contact with such soil ormaterial by being carried through an exterior cast iron tube or by some othersuitable means. Any piping or fitting laid or fixed, which does not comply with theabove requirements, shall be removed and re-laid in conformity with the aboverequirements.

(f) All pipes shall be so laid and fixed and maintained as to be and to remaincompletely water tight, thereby avoiding waste of water, damage to the propertyand the risk of contamination of the water conveyed.

(g) The change in diameter and in direction shall preferably be gradual rather thanabrupt to avoid undue loss of head. No bend or curve in piping shall be made soas to alter the cross section.


12

LAYING AND JOINTING OF WATER SUPPLY PIPES AND FITTINGS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS of UNDER GROUND WORKS

1. UNLOADING :

(a) The pipes shall be unloaded where they are required.

(b) Unloading (except where mechanical handling facilities are available) – pipesweighing upto 60 kg shall be handled by two persons by hand passing. Heavierpipes shall be unloaded from the lorry or wagon by holding them in loops, formedwith ropes and sliding over planks set not steeper than 45 degree. The planksshall be sufficiently rigid and two ropes shall always be used to roll the pipesdown the planks. The ropes should be tied on the side opposite the unloading.Only one pipe shall be unloaded at a time.

(c) Under no circumstances shall be the pipes be thrown down from the carriers orbe dragged or rolled along hard surfaces.

(d) The pipes shall be checked for any visible damage (such as broken edges,cracking or spalling of pipe) while unloading and shall be sorted out forreclamation. Any pipe which shows sufficient damage to preclude it from beingused shall be discarded.

2. STORING :

(a) The pipes and specials shall be handled with sufficient care to avoid damage tothem. These shall be lined up on one side of the alignment of the trench socketfacing upgrade when line runs uphill and upstream when lines run on levelground.

(b) Each stack shall contain pipes of same class and size, consignment or batchnumber and particulars of the suppliers, wherever possible, shall be marked onthe stack.

(c) Storage shall be done on firm, level and clean ground. Wedges shall be providedat the bottom layer to keep the stack stable.

3. CUTTING :

(a) Cutting of pipes may be necessary when pipes are to be laid in lengths shorterthan the lengths supplied, such as while replacing accessories like tees, bends,etc. at fixed position in the pipe lines.

(b) A line shall be marked around the pipe with a chalk piece at the point where it isto be cut. The line shall be so marked that the cut is truly at right angle to thelongitudinal axis of the pipe.


13

4. TRENCHES :

(a) The trenches shall be so dug that the pipes may be laid to the required alignmentand at required depth.

(b) Cover shall be measured from top of pipe to the surface of the ground. In generalthe cover should be 1000 mm unless specified in drawings.

(c) The minimum width of the trench should be “D + 400 mm”, where, D is outerdiameter of the pipe.

(d) For pipes with diameter less than 1200 mm, the bed of the trench shall beexcavated to the pipe grades so that uniform support is assured for the full lengthof the pipe.

(e) The bed of the trench, if in soft or made up earth, shall be well watered andrammed before laying the pipes and the depressions, if any, shall be properlyfilled with earth and consolidated in 20 cm layer.

(f) If the trench bottom is extremely hard or rocky or loose stony soil, the trench shallbe excavated at least 150 mm below the trench grade. Rocks, stone or otherhard substances from the bottom of the trench shall be removed and the trenchbrought back to the required grade by filling with selected fine earth or sand (orfine moorum if fine soil or sand is not available locally) and compacted so as toprovide a smooth bedding for the pipe or provide lean cement concrete asrequired and specified..

(g) After the excavation of the trench is completed, hollows shall be cut at therequired position to receive the socket of the pipes and these hollows shall be ofsufficient depth to ensure that the barrels of the pipes shall rest throughout theirentire length on the solid ground and that sufficient spaces left for jointing theunderside of the pipe joint. These socket holes shall be refilled with sand afterjointing the pipe.

(h) Roots of trees within a distance of about 0.5 meter from the side of the pipe lineshall be removed or killed.

(i) The excavated materials shall not be placed within 1 meter or half of the depth ofthe trench, whichever is greater, from the edge of the trench. The materialsexcavated shall be separated and stacked so that in refilling that may be re-laidand compacted in the same order to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

(j) The trench shall be kept free from water. Shoring and timbering shall be providedwherever required. Excavation below water table shall be done after dewateringthe trenches.

(k) Where the pipe line or drain crosses an existing road, the road crossing shall beexcavated half at a time, the 2nd half being commenced after the pipes havebeen laid in the first half and the trench refilled. Necessary safety measures fortraffic as directed shall be adopted. All types, water main cables, etc. met withinthe course of excavation shall be carefully protected and supported. Care shallbe taken not to disturb the electrical and communication cable met with duringcourse of excavation, removal of which, if necessary, shall be arranged by theEngineer-in-charge.

(l) When pipes are laid under road and pavements, subjected to heavy traffic loads,the trench may be covered with RCC slabs of suitable dimensions.


14

5. LAYING :

(a) The pipes shall be lowered into the trench by means of suitably pulley blocks,sheer legs chains ropes etc. In no case the pipes shall be rolled and dropped intothe trench. One end of each rope may be tied to a wooden or steel peg driveninto the ground and the other end held by men which when slowly released willlower the pipe into the trench. After lowering, the pipes shall be arranged so thatthe spigot of one pipe is carefully centered into the socket of the next pipe, andpushed to the full distance that it can go. The pipe line shall be laid to the levelsrequired. Specials shall also be laid in their proper position as stated above.

(b) Where so directed, the pipes and specials may be laid on masonry or concretepillars. The pipe laid on the level ground, shall be laid with socket facing thedirection of flow of water.

(c) In unstable soils, such as soft soils and dry lumpy soils it shall be checkedwhether the soils can support the pipe lines and if required suitable specialfoundation shall be provided.

6. THRUST BLOCKS :

(a) Thrust blocks are required to transfer the resulting hydraulic thrust from the fittingof pipe on to a larger load bearing soil section.

(b) Thrust blocks shall be installed wherever there is a change in the direction / sizeof the pipe line or the pressure line diagram, or when the pipe line ends at a deadend. If necessary, thrust blocks may be constructed at valves also.

(c) Thrust blocks shall be constructed taking into account the pipe size, waterpressure, type of fitting, gravity component shell when laid on slopes and thetype of soil.

7. BACK FILLING AND TAMPING :

(a) Back filling shall follow pipe installation as closely as possible to protect pipe fromfalling boulders, eliminating possibility of lifting of the pipe due to flooding of opentrench and shifting pipe out of line by caved in soil.

(b) The initial back fill material used shall be free of large stones and dry lumps.

(c) The initial back fill shall be placed evenly in a layer of about 100 mm thick. Thisshall be properly consolidated and this shall be continued till there is a cushion ofat least 300 mm of cover over the pipe.

(d) If it is desired to observe the joint or coupling during the testing of mains theyshall be left exposed. Sufficient back fill shall be placed on the pipe to resist themovement due to pressure while testing.

8. HYDROSTATIC TESTS :

(a) After a new pipe has been laid, jointed and back filled (or any valved sectionthereof), it shall be subjected to the following two tests :


15

(m) Pressure test : At a pressure of at least double the maximum workingpressure-pipe and joints shall be absolutely water tight under the test.

(ii) Leakage test : (To be conducted after the satisfactory completion of thepressure test) at a pressure to be specified by the authority for a durationof two hours.

(b) Hydrostatic Tests : The portions of the line shall be tested by subjecting topressure test as the laying progresses before the entire line is completed. In thisway any error of workmanship will be found immediately and can be corrected ata minimum cost. Usually the length of the section to be tested shall not exceed500m.

(c) Where any section of a main is provided with concrete thrust blocks oranchorages, the pressure test shall not be made until at least five days haveelapsed after the concrete is cast. If rapid hardening cement has been used inthese blocks or anchorages, test shall not be made until atleast two days haveelapsed.

(d) Prior to testing, enough back fill shall be placed over the pipe line to resistupward thrust. All thrust blocks forming part of the finished line shall have beensufficiently cured and no temporary bracing shall be used.

(e) The open end of the section shall be sealed temporarily with an end cap havingan outlet which can serve as an air relief vent or for filling the line, as may berequired. The blind face of the end cap shall be properly braced during testing byscrew jacks and wooden planks or steel plate.

(f) The section of the line to be tested shall be filled with water manually or by a lowpressure pump. Air shall be vented from all high spots in the pipe line beforemaking the pressure strength test because entrapped air gets compressed andcaused difficulty in raising the required pressure for the pressure strength test.

PROCEDURE FOR PRESSURE TEST :

1. Each valved section of the pipe shall be slowly filled with water and all air shallbe expelled from the pipe through hydrants and blowoffs. If these are notavailable at high places, necessary tapping may be made at points of highestelevation before the test is made and plugs inserted after the tests have beencompleted.

2. If the trench has been partially back-filled the specified pressure based on theelevation of the lowest point of the line or section under test and corrected to theelevation of the test gauge, shall be applied by means of a pump connected tothe pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer-in-charge. The duration of thetest shall not be less than 5 minutes.

3. Examination under Pressure : All exposed pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants andjoints should be carefully examined during the open-trench test. When the jointsare made with lead, all such joints showing visible leaks shall be recaulked untiltight. When the joints are made with cement and show seepage or slight leakage,such joints shall be cut out and replaced as directed by the authority. Anycracked or defective pipes, fittings, valves or hydrants discovered inconsequence of this pressure test shall be removed and replaced by soundmaterial and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory to the Engineer-in-charge.

4. If the trench has been back-filled to the top, the section shall be first subjected towater pressure normal to the area and the exposed parts shall be carefully


16

examined. If any defects are found, they shall be repaired and the pressure testrepeated until no defects are found. The duration of the final pressure tests shallbe at least one hour.

PROCEDURE FOR LEAKAGE TEST :

5. Leakage is defined as the quantity of water to be supplied into the newly laidpipe, or any valved section thereof, necessary to maintain the specified leakagetest pressure after the pipe has been filled the water and the air expelled.

No pipe installation shall be accepted until the leakage is less than the number ofcm3/h determined by the formula :

ql = NDP / 3.3

Where ql = the allowable leakage in cm3/h.N = number of joints in the length of the pipe line.D = diameter in mm, andP = the average test pressure during the leakage testing

kg/cm2.

6. Variation from Permissible Leakage : Should any test of pipe laid in positiondiscloses leakage greater than the specified in para 5 the defective joints shall berepaired until the leakage is within the specified allowance.


17

LAYING AND JOINTING UNPLASTICISED P.V.C. PIPES (EXTERNAL WORK)

1. HANDLING AND STORAGE :

Unplasticized P.V.C. pipes are light in weight material. Reasonable care shall be taken inhandling and storage of these to prevent damages. On no account the pipes shall bedragged along the ground. Pipes shall be given adequate support at all times. They shallnot be stacked in large piles, especially under warm temperature conditions as thebottom pipes may distort, thus giving rise to difficulty in pipe alignment and jointing.

For temporary storage in the field, where racks are not provided care shall be taken thatthe ground is level and free from loose stones. Pipes stored thus shall not exceed threelayers and shall be so stacked as to prevent movement, the pipes shall preferably bestored under shade.

For satisfactory service performance of plastic pipes under conditions of use, thefollowing points must be kept in view while undertaking installation of plastic pipingsystem :

a) The plastic materials are ‘thermoplastic’ in nature, and must not be used incontact with hot surfaces (or hot water) ;

b) They must be supported at regular intervals for above ground installation ;

c) Allowance must be made, during installation for their expansion, particularly byusing loose clips / clamps ;

d) A range of specials, and matching fittings must be identified and theirmanufactures / suppliers listed.

2. TRENCHES :

The trench bottom shall be carefully examined for the presence of hard objects such asflints, rock projections or tree roots etc. pipes shall be bedded in sand or soft soil freefrom rock and gravel. Back fill 15 cm above the pipe shall also be of fine sand or soft soil.Pipes shall not be painted. The width of trench shall be not less than outside dia meter ofpipe plus 30 cm in case of gravel soils. Pipes shall be laid at least 90 cms below theground level (measured from surface of the ground to the top of the pipe).

3. JOINTING :

(a) Solvent welded joints : Non heat application Method :

In this method, instead of forming a socket on one pipe and an injection moulded socketfitting or coupler is used, with a provision to take in the pipes at both ends, the solventcements are applied on the surfaces to be jointed and the joint is made at ambenttemperature. Injection moulded fittings only shall be used in preference to fabricatedfittings, only solvent recommended by the manufacturers of the pipes shall be used andfull load on the joints applied only after 24 hours. The pipe shall be cut perpendicular tothe axis of the pipe length with a metal cutting saw or an ordinary hand saw with smallteeth. Pipe ends have to be beveled slightly with a beveling tool (Reamer) at an angle ofabout 30 degree. The total length of insertion socket (injection moulded socket orcouplet) shall be marked on the pipe and checked how far the pipe end could be inserted


18

into the fitting socket. Attempt shall be made to push the pipe to the marked distance ifnot possible it shall at least be pushed for 2/3 of this distance.

Dust, oil, water grease etc. shall be wiped cut with a drycloth from the surface. Furtherthe grease should be throughly removed with a suitable solvent, such as methylenechloride or as an alternative the outside surface of the pipe and the inside of the fittingmay be roughened with emery paper.

Generous coating of solvent cement shall be evenly applied on the inside of the fittingalround the circumference for the full length of insertion and on the outside of the pipeend upto the marked line with non synthetic brush of suitable dimension. The pipe shallbe pushed into the fitting socket and held for 1 or 2 minutes as otherwise the pipe maycome out of the fitting due to the slippery quality of cement and the tapering inside boreof the fitting. The surplus cement on the pipe surfaces shall be wiped out. If the solventcement has dried up too much or the tapering of the socket is too steep, jointing will notbe proper and pipe will come out of the fitting.

In summer months joints shall be made preferable early in the morning or in the eveningwhen it is cooler. This will prevent joint from pulling apart when the pipe cools off at night.Heat application method for jointing shall not be allowed.

(b) Flanged Joints :

For jointing P.V.C. pipes particularly of larger sizes to valves and vessels and larger sizemetal pipes where the tensile strength is required the joint is made by the compression ofa gasket or ring seal set in the face of C. I. flange. Flanges solvent welded to the P.V.C.pipes shall be supplied by the manufacturers.

4. CROSSING ROAD OR DRAIN :

Where the pipe line crosses a road or a drain, it shall be through R.C.C. pipe.

5. SUPPORTS FOR VALVE AND HYDRANT :

Valve and hydrant tees shall be supported, so that the torque applied in operating a valveis not transmitted to the pipe line.

6. INSPECTION AND TESTING :

Solvent welded pipe shall not be pressure tested until at least 24 hours after the lastsolvent cemented joint has been done.

All control valves shall be positioned open for the duration of the test and open endclosed with water tight fittings. The testing pressure on completion of the work shall notbe less than one and a half time the working pressure of the pipes.

Pressure shall be applied either by hand pump or power driven pump. Pressure gaugesshall be correctly positioned and closely observed to ensure that at no time are the testpressure exceeded. The systems shall be slowly and carefully filled with water to avoidsurge pressure or water hammer. Air vents shall be open at all high points so that air maybe expelled from the system during filling.


19

When the system has been fully charged with water and air displaced from the line airvent shall be closed and the line initially inspected for seepage at joints and firmness ofsupports under load. Pressure may then be applied until the required test pressure isreached.

Without any additional requirement of make-up-water the test pressure should not fallmore than 0.2 kg/sq.cm. at the end of one hour test duration.

7. MEASUREMENTS :

The length shall be measured in running meter correct to a cm for the finished workwhich shall include P.V.C. fittings such as bends, tees, elbows, reducer, crosses, plugs,sockets, nipples and nuts, but exclude taps, valves, etc. All pipes and fittings shall beclassified according to their outside diameters and pressure ratings. Fitting of unequaloutside diameter shall be measured alongwith the larger diameter pipe.


20

P.V.C. Pipes Service Connection

Either metal or P.V.C. saddles, as specified, shall be used for the off take of service connectionsfrom larger bore pipes (50 mm diameter and above). The saddle consists of two half roundsections of metal or P.V.C. which are bolted together or held round the pipe by wedge grips. Aseal is formed between the saddle and the pipe and the under surface of the upper section. Theservice connection is taken from a boss on the upper section.

Conventional equipment for tapping under pressure may be used with these service connectionsusing a special trapanning cutter to pierce the pipe wall. Ferrules shall not be screwed directlyinto pipes without the introduction of saddle piece. A typical illustration of a ferrule connection20.11.2

Measurements

Connections shall be enumerated.

Rate

The rate shall include the cost of labour and materials involved in all the operations describedabove.

P.V.C. Pipe-Repairs

While temporary or emergency repairs may be made to the damaged pipes, permanent repairsshould be made by replacement of the damaged section. In case of damage by external blows,the extent of the damage may be greater on the inner-surface.

Some times, pipes are damaged accidentally due to trenching operation in street repairs. Shellsplit orchipout occur in the wall of the pipe, a short piece of pipe of sufficient length to cover thedamaged portion of the pipe is cut. The sleeve is cut longitudinally and heated sufficiently tosoften it so that it may be slipped over the damaged pipe.IMeasurements

Repairs shall be enumerated.

RateRate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations describedabove.


21

Laying and Jointing P.V.C. Pipes (Internal Work)

Clamping

The pipes shall be laid and clamped to wooden plugs fixed above the surface of the wall.Alternatively plastic clamps of suitable designs, wherever manufactured, shall be preferred.Provision shall be made for the effect of thermal movement by not gripping or districting the pipeat supports between the anchors for suspended pipes. The supports shall allow the repeatedlongitudinal temperature movement to take place without abrasion. Line or point contact with thepipe shall be avoided. Heavy components such as metal valves shall be individually supported.

Supports

P.V.C. pipes require supports at close interval. Recommended support spacings for unplasticisedP. V.C. pipes are given in Table 2. This spacing may be increased by 50% for vertical runssupport.

TABLE 2

Pipe Dia mm Support spacing mm

20

25

32

40

50

700

750

825

975

975

It is essential that P.V.C pipes shall be aligned properly before fixing them on the wooden plugswith clamps. Even if the wooden plugs are fixed using a plumb line, P.V.C. pipe shall also bechecked for its alignment before clamping. The pipe line will be wavy if the clamps are not fixedkeeping the pipeplumb.

Connection to a Water Tap

Connection to the water tap shall be made by means of a G.I. adopter as shown in the Fig. 8. G.I.adopter shall preferably be supplied by the same manufacturer as that of P.V.C. pipe. In anythreaded coupling between P.V.C. and G.I. it is preferable that P.V.C. is fitted inside the G.I.fitting. If however greater projection is desired, same shall be achieved by joining a short piece ofa G.I. pipe (Nipple)

Connection from Masonry/Concrete Water Tank


22

Solvent cement shall be coated on the section of the pipe to be embedded in concrete. Fine drysand and cement mixture shall be sprinkled uniformly around the pipe. This shall give a roughsurface which can be safely embedded in concrete, water proofing cement shall be used to closethe gap properly.

Measurements

The length shall be measured in running metre correct to a cm for the finished work which shallinclude P.V.C. fittings such as bends, tees, elbows, reducer, crosses plugs, sockets, nipples andnuts, but exclude, taps, valves, etc. All pipes and fittings shall be classified according to theiroutside diameters and pressure ratings. Fittings of unequal outside diameter shall be measuredalong with the larger diameter pipe.

Rate

The rate shall include the cost of labour and material in all the operation described above, exceptmetal pipe used for encasing P.V.C. pipe and anchor blocks, unless otherwise specified.


23

CPVC PIPES FOR COLD & HOT WATER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION NETWORK

The scope of this specifications cover pipes & fittings using CPVC Compound. The CPVCcompound shall confirm to NSF certification for use in drinking / portable water. It also coversgeneral & technical properties of the CPVC pipes, fittings, the basic compound, installationprocedures, cement solvent details , special fittings, Concealed & external plumbing etc.

STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS

IS : 15778 : 2007 - Specification for Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipes forPotable Hot & Cold water distribution systems.

ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) and Chlorinated PolyVinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds.

ASTM D2846 - Specification for Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Hot & Cold waterdistribution systems.

ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride(CPVC) Plastic Pipe & Fittings.

Technical Details of CPVC{Abbreviations: OD Outer Dia., ID Inner Dia., WT Wall Thickness.}

General Properties:

Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 23oC 1.55Specific Volume ASTM D 570 23oC 0.645cm2/gWater Absorption ASTM D 785 23oC +0.03%

100OC +0.55%

MECHANICAL

Izod Impact ASTM D 256 23oC 80J/mo.nTensile Strength ASTM D 638 23oC 55N/mm2

Flexural Strength ASTM D 790 23OC 104N/mm2

Compressive Strength ASTM D 695 23OC 70N/mm2


24

TECHNICAL DETAILS

Outside Diameter and Wall Thickness for CPVC SDR 11 Plastic Pipe

Nominal Size(MM)

Avg. OD MM(SDR II)

Tolerance(MM)

Min. Wall Thickness MM(SDR II)

Tolerance(MM)

15 15.90 +/- 0.08 1.70 + 0.51

20 22.20 +/- 0.08 2.00 + 0.51

25 28.60 +/- 0.08 2.59 + 0.51

32 34.90 +/- 0.08 3.18 + 0.51

40 41.30 +/- 0.10 3.76 + 0.51

50 54.00 +/- 0.10 4.90 + 0.58

CPVC SDR 11 Pipe Pressure Rating vs Temperature Table

Operating Temperature Working Pressure Rating (kg/cm2)

SDR II

15 TO 50 MM DIA23°C 28.10

27°C 28.10

32°C 25.57

38°C 23.05

43°C 21.64

49°C 18.27

54°C 17.42

60°C 14.05

66°C 13.21

71°C 11.24

77°C 8.99

82°C 7.03

93°C 5.62


25

JOINING CPVC PIPES & FITTINGS

CUTTING –

In order to make a proper and neat joint, measure the pipe length accurately and make a smallmark. Ensure that the pipe and fittings are size compatible. Cut the pipe with a plastic pipe cutteror hacksaw blade. Cutting tubing as squarely as possible provides optimal bonding area within ajoint.

DEBURRING / BEVELING –

Burrs and fillings can prevent proper contact between tube and fitting during assembly and shouldbe removed from the outside and inside of the pipe. Debarking tool, pocket knife or file is suitablefor this. A slight bevel on the end of the tubing will ease entry of the tubing into the fitting socket.

FITTING PREPARATION -

Using a clean, dry rag, wipe dirt and moisture from the fitting sockets and tubing end. The tubingshould make contact with the socket wall 1/3 to 2/3 of the way into the fitting socket.

SOLVENT CEMENT APPLICATION –

Use only CPVC cement or an all – purpose cement conforming to ASTM F 493 or joint failuremay result. When making a joint, apply a heavy, even coat of coat of cement to the pipe end. Usethe same applicator without additional cement to apply a thin coat inside the fitting socket. Toomuch cement can cause clogged water ways.

ASSEMBLY –

Immediately insert the tubing into the fitting socket, rotate the tube ¼ to ½ turn while inserting.This motion ensures and even distribution of cement within the joint. Properly align the fittings.Hold the assembly for approximately 10 seconds, allowing the joint to set-up.

SET AND CURE TIMES –

Solvent cement set and cure times are a function of pipe size, temperature and relative humidity.Curing time is shorter for drier environments, smaller sizes and higher temperatures. It requires10 to 20 minutes for perfect joint.

MINIMUM CURE TIME PRIOR TO PRESSURE TESTING AT 150 PSI(10 BAR)

Ambient TemperatureDuring Cure Period

Pipe Sizes

15 to 25 mm dia 32 to 50 mm dia

Above 15°C 1 Hour 2 Hours

4 - 15°C 2 Hours 4 Hours

Below 4°C 4 Hours 8 Hours


26

TESTING

Once an installation is completed and cured as per these recommendations. The system shouldbe hydrostatically pressure tested at10 bar for one hour is recommended. When pressure testing,the system should be filled with water and all air bled from the highest and farthest points in therun. If a leak is found, the joint must be cut out and discarded. A new section can be installedusing couplings. During sub-freezing temperatures, water should be blown out of the lines aftertesting to eliminate potential damage from freezing. Air testing is not recommended.

HANDLING AND STORAGE

Reasonable care should be exercised in handling CPVC tubing and fittings. They should not bedropped, stepped on, or have objects thrown on them. If improper handling or heavy impactresults in cracks, splits or gouges, the damaged section should be discarded. CPVC tubingshould be covered with a non-transparent material when stored outdoors for long periods of time.When installing CPVC pipe and fitting in an area that is exposed to direct sunlight for anextended period of time, protect the pipe with insulation or an acrylic water based white paint.

HANGER AND SUPPORTS

For vertical / horizontal runs, support at 1 meter intervals for all diameter is desired. Pipingshould not be anchored tightly to supports, but rather secured with smooth straps or hangers thatallow for movement caused by expansion and contraction.

SAFE HANDLING OF SOLVENT CEMENT

When using solvent cements, primers and cleaners there are some basic safety measures allusers should keep in mind.

Avoid prolonged breathing of solvent vapors. When pipe and fittings are being joined inenclosed areas, the uses of ventilating devices are advised.

Keep cements, primers and cleaners away from all sources of ignition, heat, sparks and openflame.

Keep containers of cements, primers and cleaners tightly closed except when the product isbeing used.

Dispose of all rags used with solvents in a proper outdoor waste receptacle.

Avoid eye and skin contact. In case of eye contact, flush with plenty of water for 15 minutesand call a physician.


27

PVC (Sch40 & sch80) PIPES FOR COLD WATER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTIONNETWORK

PRODUCT FEATURES

General –

PVC sch 40 / 80 plumbing system is suitable for all cold water plumbing and drinking waterapplications. The pipes are manufactured by extrusion process and fittings are manufactured byinjection moulding process.

Raw Material –

The rigid PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) compound used in the manufacture of pipes and fittings isType 1, i.e. Grade 1 PVC 1120 as identified in ASTM D 1784. The compound contains specifiedamounts of pigment, stabilizers and other additives to facilitate extrusion.

Product Specifications –

The system is made as per ASTM (American Society for Testing of Materials) standards. ThePipes are made as per ASTM D 1785 and Fittings are made as per ASTM D 2466 (for SCH 40Fittings) and ASTM D 2467 (for SCH 80 Fittings). The pipes are plain ended in lengths of 3meters in SCH 40 and SCH 80 pressure classes.

PRESSURE RATING – PVC SCHEDULE 40

Norm Size (mm) Max. Work Pre. at 23°C (kg/cm2)

15 42.19

20 33.75

25 31.64

32 26.01

40 23.20

50 19.69

65 21.09

80 18.28

100 15.47

150 12.66


28

PVC SCHEDULE 40 & 80 PRESSURE PIPES AND FITTINGS INSTALLATIONPROCEDURES

1. CUT PIPE

Cut pipe square. As joints are sealed at the base of the fitting socket. An angled cutresult in joint failure.

Acceptable tools include miter saw, mechanical cut off saw or wheel cutter. Wheeltype cutters must employ a blade designed for plastics.

2. REMOVE BURR AND BEVEL

Remove all burrs from inside and outside of pipe with a knife-edge, file, or deburringtool. Chamfer(bevel) the end of the pipe 10° - 15°.

CLEAN

Remove surface dirt, grease, or moisture with a clean dry cloth.

3. DRY FIT

With light pressure, pipe should go one third to one half of the way into the fittingsocket. Pipes and fittings that are too tight or too loose should not be used.

4. APPLICATOR

Use an applicator that is one half the pipe diameter.

Too large an applicator will force excessive cement into the inside of small diameterfittings. Too small an applicator will not apply sufficient cement to large diametersystems.

5. CEMENT

Apply a full even layer of cement to the outside of a pipe and medium layer ofcement to the inside of a fitting.

6. JOIN PIPE AND FITTINGS

Assemble pipe and fitting socket till it contacts socket bottom. Give pipe a quarterturn. Hold pipe and fitting together until the pipe does not back out.

Remove excessive cement from the exterior. A properly made joint will show acontinuous bead of cement around the perimeter.

PVC cement for SCH 40 and interference fit


29

Pipe Size (In.) Cement Type Min. Vis. (CP) IPS-weld On

15 – 50 mm Medium bodied 500 705

65 – 150 mm Heavy bodied 1600 717

PVC SCHEDULE 40 & SCHEDULE 80 PRESSURE PIPES AND FITTINGS SUPPORTSPACING FOR PVC PIPE -

SUPPORT AND SPACING

All piping should be supported with an approved hanger at intervals sufficiently close to maintaincorrect pipe alignment and to prevent sagging or geode reversal. Pipe should also be supportedat all branch ends and at all changes of direction. Support traps arms as close as possible to thetrap. In keeping with good plumbing practices support and brace all closet bends and fastencloset flanges.

1. Concentrated load should be supported directly so as to eliminate high stress concentrations.Should this be impractical then the pipe must be supported immediately adjacent to the load.

2. In system where large fluctuations in temperature occur, allowances must be made forexpansion and contraction of the piping system. Since changes in direction in the system areusually sufficient to allow for expansion and contraction hangers must be placed so as not torestrict this movement.

3. Hangers should provide as much bearing surface as possible. To prevent damage to thepipe, file smooth any sharp edges or burrs on the hungers or supports.

Schedule – 40

Recommended Support spacing (in mm)

Nom. Pipe Size(mm)

Support Spacing (mm)

15 750

20 750

25 900

32 900

40 1000

50 1000

63 1200

75 1200

100 1350

150 1500

PVC SCHEDULE 40 & SCHEDULE 80 PRESSURE PIPES AND FITTINGS –


30

JOINT CURING -

Recommended initial set times

Temperature Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe SizeRange 15 – 32 mm 40 – 80 mm 100 – 150

mm15.5°C – 37.7°C 15 min. 30 min. 1 hour

4.4°C – 15.5°C 1 hour 2 hours 4 hours

Recommended initial cure times

Temperature Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe SizeRange 15 – 32 mm 40 – 80 mm 100 – 150

mm15.5°C – 37.7°C 6 hours 12 hours 24 hour

4.4°C – 15.5°C 12 hour 24 hours 48 hours

TESTING PRESSURE SYSTEM

1. Conduct pressure testing with water. DO NOT USE AIR OR OTHER GASES for pressuretesting.

2. The piping system should be adequately anchored to limit movement. Water under pressureexerts thrust forces in piping systems. Thrust blocking should be provided at changes ofdirection, change in size and at dead ends.

3. Refer tables given for initial set & cure times before pressure testing.

4. The piping system should be slowly filled with water, taking care to prevent surge and airentrapment. The flow velocity should not exceed 1 feet per second.

5. All trapped air must be slowly released. Vents must be provided at all high points of thepiping system. All valves and air relief mechanisms should be opened so that the air can bevented while the system is extremely dangerous and it must be slowly and completely ventedprior to testing.

6. The piping system can be pressurized to 125% of its designed working pressure. Howevercare must be taken to ensure the pressure does not exceed the working pressure of thelowest rated component in the system (valves, unions, flanges, threaded parts etc.)

7. The pressure test should not exceed one hour. Any leaking joints or pipe must be cut out andreplaced and the line recharged and retested using the same procedure.

UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION


31

PVC pipes and fittings can be installed underground, since these piping systems are flexiblesystems, proper attention should be given to burial conditions. The stiffness of the piping systemis affected by sidewall support, soil compaction, and the condition of the trench, Trench bottomsshould be smooth and regular in either undisturbed soil or a layer of compacted backfill. Pipemust lie evenly on this surface throughout the entire length of its barrel.

TRENCHING

The following trenching and burial procedures should be used to protect the piping system.

1. The trench should be excavated to ensure the sides will be stable under all workingconditions.

2. The trench should be wide enough to provide adequate room for the following –

Jointing the pipe in the trench.

Snaking the pipe from side or side to compensate for expansion and contraction.

Filling and compacting the side fills.

The space between the pipe and trench wall must be wider than the compactionequipment used in the compaction of the backfill. Minimum width shall not be less thanthe greater of either the pipe outside diameter plus 16 inches or the pipe outsidediameter times 1.25 plus 12 inches. Trench width may be different if approved by thedesign engineer.

3. The trench bottom should be smooth, free of rocks and debris, continuous, and provideuniform support. If ledge rock, hardpan or large boulders are encountered, the trenchbottom should be padded with bedding of compacted granular material to a thickness ofat least 4 inches. Foundation bedding should be installed as required by the engineer.

4. Trench depth is determined by the pipe’s service requirements. Plastic pipe shouldalways be installed at least below the frost level. The minimum cover for lines subject toheavy overhead traffic is 24 inches.

5. A smooth, trench bottom is necessary to support the pipe over its entire length on firmstable material. Blocking should be used charge pipe grade or to intermittently supportpipe over low sections in the trench.

BEDDING AND BACKILLING

1. Even though sub-soil conditions vary widely from place to place, the pipe backfill shouldbe stable and provide protection for the pipe.

2. The pipe should be surrounded with a granular material which is easily worked aroundthe sides of the pipe Backfilling should be performed in layer of 6 inch. With each layerbeing sufficiently compacted to 85% to 95% compaction.

3. A mechanical tamper is recommended for compacting sand and gravel backfill whichcontain a significant proportion of fine grained material, such as silt and clay. If a tamperis not available, compacting should be done by hand.

4. The trench should be completely filled. The backfill should be placed and spread in fairyuniform layers to prevent any unfilled spaces or voids. Large rocks, stones, frozen clods,or other large debris should be removed. Heavy tampers or rolling equipment should onlybe used to consolidate only the final backfill.


32

HANDLING

The pipe should be handled with reasonable care. Because thermoplastic pipe is much lighter inweight than metal pipe. There is sometimes a tendency to throw it around. This should beavoided.

The pipe should never be dragged or pushed from a truck bed. Pallets for pipe should beremoved with a fork lift. Loose pipe can be rolled down timbers, as long as the pieces do not fallon each other or on any hard or uneven surface.

In all cases, severe contact with any sharp objects (rocks, angle irons, forks on forklifts, etc.)should be avoided.

STORING

If possible, pipe should be stored inside. When this is not possible, the pipe should be stored onlevel ground which is dry and free from sharp objects. If different schedules of pipes are stackedtogether, the pipe with the thickest walls should be at the bottom.

The pipe should be protected from the sun and be in an area with proper ventilation. This willlessen the effects of ultraviolet rays and help prevent heat built-up.

If the pipe is stored in racks, it should be continuously supported along its length. If This is notpossible, the spacing of the supports should not exceed three feet (3’).

POLYETHYLENE WATER STORAGE TANKS

1. MATERIAL :


33

Polyethylene used for manufacture of tanks and manhole lids shall be high density(HDPE); and shall conform to IS : 10146. Polyethylene shall be compounded with carbonblack so as to make the tank resistant to ultra violet rays from the sun. the percentage ofcarbon black content in polyethylene shall be 2.5 ± 0.5 percent and it shall be uniformlydistributed. The materials used for the manufacture of tank, manhole lid and fittings shallbe such that they neither contaminate the water nor impart any taste, colour, odour ortoxity to water.

2. MANUFACTURE AND FINISH :

The tanks shall be manufactured by rotational moulding process. Each tank and themanhole lid shall be single piece having arrangement for fixing and locking the manholelid with the tanks. Excess material at the mould parting line and near the top rim shall beneatly cut and finished. The internal and external surface of the tanks shall be smooth,clean and free from didden internal defects like air bubbles, pit and metallic or otherforeign material inclusion. Capacity of the tank, minimum weight of the empty tank(without manhole lid) and the manufacture brand name shall be embossed on the topsurface of the tank near manhole.

3. SHAPE, SIZE AND CAPACITY :

The tank shall be cylindrical vertical with closed top having a manhole. Diameter andheight of the tank of various capacities shall be as per manufacturer’s specifications anda clearance of ±3 percent shall be permitted on these dimensions.

4. WEIGHT AND WALL THICKNESS :

Minimum weight of the empty tank (exclusive of manhole lid fittings) and the minimumwall thickness of top, bottom and sides shall be specified in Table below. Wall thicknessshall be checked beyond 150 mm of the edge where the direction the plane of tanksurface changes.


34

TABLE

S.No. Capacity(liters)

Minimum Wallthickness (mm)

Minimum Weight ofempty Tank (kg)

(1) (2) (3) (4)1. 200 4.4 7.82. 300 4.4 9.03. 400 5.5 15.04. 500 6.0 18.05. 700 6.6 23.56. 1000 7.0 33.07. 1250 7.0 40.08. 1500 7.0 47.09. 1700 7.0 54.0

10. 2000 8.2 64.011. 2500 8.2 81.012. 3000 8.8 96.013. 4000 10.0 138.014. 5000 10.7 191.015. 6000 10.7 209.016. 7500 10.7 250.017. 10000 11.5 363.018. 15000 11.5 550.019. 20000 13.2 814.0

5. INSTALLATION AND FITTINGS :

The flat base of the tank shall be fully supported over its whole bottom area on a durablerigid flat and level platform sufficiently strong to stand without deflection the weight of thetank when fully filled with water. Depending upon the capacity and location tanks may besuitably anchored as per the directions of the Engineer-in-charge. For inlet, outlet andother connections fully threaded G. I. HDPE or PVC connections with hexagonalchecknuts and washerson either side of the tank wall shall be provided. Holes forthreaded connections shall be drilled and not punched. Pipes entering of leaving the tankshall be provided with unions and suitably supported on a firm base to avoid damage tothe tank walls.

6. MANHOLE LID :

The lid shall rest evenly and fit over the rim of the manhole so as to prevent the ingress ofany foreign mater into the tank. The lid shall be provided with suitable arrangement forlocking it with the tank.

SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND RAIN WATER PIPES AND FITTINGS


35

(PVC PIPES)

1 SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of this section comprises the supply, installation, testing and commissioning ofinternal soil, waste, vent and rain water disposal pipes.

2 BASIC PIPING SYSTEM

Soil, waste, vent and rain water pipes of 75 / 110 / 160 mm dia in shafts, ducts and inconcealed areas i.e. sunken slab etc. shall consist of UV stabilized uPVC SWR pipes asper type B of IS:13592 & fittings as per IS:14735. The pipes and fittings shall be suitablefor rubber ring joint. All fittings shall be of injection moulded type. The rubber rings shallconfirm to IS : 5382. The waste pipes of 65 mm and smaller dia shall be of rigid uPVC asper IS:4985 of min 6 kg / sq cm, suitable for solvent cement joints.

The wall thickness of Pipes shall be as follows –

75 mm diameter - wall thickness 3.2 to 3.8 mm



Pipes shall be fixed by means of clamps in two sections, bolted together, built into thewalls, wedged and neatly jointed as directed and approved by the Engineer. All bends,branches, swan neck and other parts shall conform to the requirement and standards asdescribed for the pipes. Pipes shall be rested against the walls on suitable woodencradles. Local authority regulations applicable to the installations shall be strictly followed.

Where indicated, the soil pipes shall be continued upwards without any diminution in itsdiameter, without any bend or angle to the height shown in the drawings. Jointsthroughout shall be made with rubber ring method for 75/110/160 mm dia and solventcement for 65 mm and lower dia pipes. The soil pipes shall be covered on top with cowlas directed and approved. All vertical soil pipes shall be firmly fixed to the walls withproperly fixed clamps, and shall as far as possible be kept 50mm clear of wall.

Every waste pipe shall connected to the floor trap through the PVC hopper pipe / heightraiser and branch saddle strip or to a multi floor trap. No waste pipe shall be dischargedover the grating. The contractor will ensure that this requirement is adequately met with.Wherever floor traps are provided, it shall be ensured that at least one wash is connectedto such floor traps to avoid drying of water seal in the trap. Ventilating pipes shall be ofUPVC SWR pipes, conforming to the requirements laid down earlier.

Where soil, waste and ventilating pipes are accommodated in shafts ducts, adequateaccess to cleaning eyes shall be provided.

The internal and external pipe surfaces shall be smooth and clean. They shall be freefrom grooves, obstructions or other defects. All pipe ends shall be cut cleanly and shall beperpendicular to the axis of pipes.

All fittings used in UPVC piping systems shall be of similar characteristic and same makeas those of the pipes. All uPVC fittings shall be factory fabricated suitable for jointing topipes with rubber rings for 75 / 110 / 160 mm dia and with solvent cement for 65 mm diaand below. Appropriate solvents as recommended by the pipe manufacturer shall beused for installing the pipes at site. Solvents shall be supplied to site in originalmanufacturer's container.


36

All Water closets shall be connected through WC connectors of suitable type as per siterequirements.

The water seal of all floor traps which are connected into the pipe and manholes shall beminimum 50 mm as per IS : 5329. For other traps used as branch connections may havelesser water seal.

All pipes and fittings shall be stored, handled, cut, laid and installed in position strictly asper manufacturer's recommendations.

As soon as uPVC pipes and fittings are received at site, they shall be examined for theirwall thickness and pressure rating. Only pipes and fittings and solvents of approvedmanufacture shall be used.

UPVC pipes require supports at close intervals. Recommended support spacing forunplasticised PVC pipes is 1400 mm for pipes 50 mm dia and above. Pipes shall bealigned properly before fixing them on the wooden plugs with clamps. Even if the woodenplugs are fixed using a plumb line, pipe shall also be checked for its alignment beforeclamping, piping shall be properly supported on or suspended from clamps, hangers asspecified and as required. The Contractor shall adequately design all the brackets,saddles, anchors, clamps and hangers and be responsible for their structural sufficiency.Pipe supports shall be primer coated with rust preventive paint.

3 INSTALLATION OF SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPES

All Horizontal pipes running below the slab and along the ceiling, shall be fixed onstructural adjustable clamps, sturdy hangers of the design as called for. The pipes shallbe laid in uniform slope and proper levels. All vertical pipes shall be truly vertical fixed bymeans of stout clamps in two sections, bolted together, built into the walls, wedged andneatly jointed. The branch pipes shall be connected to the stack at the same angle asthat of fittings. All connections between soil, waste and ventilating pipes and branch pipesshall be made by using pipe fittings with inspection doors for cleaning. Pipes shall befixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and shallnot cause obstruction in shafts. Where the horizontal run off the pipe is long or where thepipes cross over building expansion joints etc.

Use WC connectors for the connection of WC to the soil pipes. Apply rubber lubricant onWC connector ring as well as on the outer side of WC pan.

4 JOINTING

(a) Make sure the spigot end and inside of socket is clean and the sealing ring isplaced evently in the socket.

(b) When cutting pipes, make sure they are cut square. Chamfer the end cut toangle of 15° with a medium file.

(c) A correct depth of entry of the spigot into the socket is required to allow thermalmovement. To achieve this, push spigot fully into the socket (remove sealing ringat this time) and make a mark on the spigot. Withdraw the spigot by 10 mm &mark the spigot with a bold line. This bold mark indicates the correct depth ofentry to allow the necessary expansion gap.

(d) Smear rubber lubricant evently on the chamfered spigot and the sealing ring.Then insert the spigot into socket with light twisting motion. Pull out the pipe toallow 10 mm expansion gap.

(e) The joint is now complete and required no additional mastics, tape or cement orany other jointing sealants.


37

5 CUTTING AND MAKING GOOD

Pipes shall be fixed and tested as building proceeds. The contractor shall provide allnecessary holes, cutouts and chases in structural members as building work proceeds.Wherever holes are cut or left originally they shall be made good with cement concrete1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) or cementmortar 1:2 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand) Cured and the surface restored to originalcondition.

Since, the toilet and kitchen floor are not sunken. Hence, provision should be made inslab during its casting, for holes for soil and waste pipes. For this purpose a brick may beplaced at slab at exact location of pipe, so that the cutting and making good the slabbecomes easy and there shall be no requirement of slab cutting at later stage.

110/160 mm dia PVC sleeve should be left in beams, retaining wall or any other placebefore its casting for passing of soil/waste pipe. The contractor should prepare shopdrawing for the exact location of sleeve and get it approved from the consultant. Cuttingof structural member will not be permitted at later stage

6 PIPE PROTECTION

Where pipes are embedded in floors, slabs, columns, beams etc., they shall be given aprotection by encasing them with 75 mm thick 1:2:4 cement concrete all round the pipesand fittings as specified in Bill of Quantity.


38

SANITARY FIXTURES & CP FITTINGS

1. SCOPE

The scope of this section consists supply, installation, testing and commissioning offollowing items.

a. Sanitary appliances and fixtures for toilets.

b. Chromium plated brass fittings

c. Stainless steel sinks in kitchen area

d. Accessories e.g. towel rods, toilet paper holders, soap dish, towel rails, coat hooksetc.

Whether specifically mentioned or not the Contractor shall provide for all appliances andfixtures all fixing devices, nuts, bolts, screws, hangers as required.

All exposed pipes within toilets and near appliances/fixtures shall be of chromium platedbrass or copper unless otherwise specified.

All sanitary fixtures and bathroom fittings will be strictly as per the Make and modelcatalogue number mentioned in the BOQ or desired by the owner / architect /consultant as an alternative to the mentioned model with all accessories related tothe model.

2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

All glazed Vitreous China Sanitary Ware fixtures shall conform to Bureau of IndianStandards IS: 2556. The details make and type of the fixtures shall be as provided in theBill of Quantities. The Vitreous China Sanitary ware shall be of one of the makes specifiedin the document. They shall be of non-porous and fully vitreous, with all the visibleportions perfectly glazed and shall absolutely be free from hairline cracks pinholes andlocal depressions. It shall be perfectly symmetrical, uniform and with smooth curves. Allsanitary fixtures and fittings shall be stored under covered roof and handled carefully toprevent any damage.

All materials shall be new and of quality conforming to specifications and subject to theapproval of the Engineer. Wherever particular makes are mentioned, the choice ofselection shall remain with the Architect/Consultant.

All appliances, fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as arerequired to complete the item in working condition whether specifically mentioned or not inthe Bill of Quantities, specifications, drawings. Accessories shall include proper fixingarrangements, brackets, nuts, bolts, washers, screws and required connection pieces.

The sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be installed at the correct assigned position asshown on the drawings and as directed by the Engineer and shall fully meet with theaesthetic and symmetrical requirements as demanded by the Engineer.

All fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in accordance with a set pattern matching thetiles or interior finish as per Architect requirements. Wherever necessary, the fittings shallbe centered to dimensions and pattern as called for.

Fixing screws shall be half round head chromium plated (CP) brass screws, with CPbrass washers unless otherwise specified. Chromium plated fittings shall be cast brass


39

chromium plated of the best quality as detailed in the Bill of Quantities and shall beapproved by Engineer prior to installation.

Fixtures shall be installed by skilled workman with appropriate tools according to the besttrade practice. Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed for the installation of fixtures.Fixtures in all toilets shall be standard height mounting as called for on the drawings.Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and true to alignment.

All appliances, fittings and fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workmanlike manner true tolevel and to heights shown on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturers'recommendations. Care shall be taken to fix all inlet and outlet pipes at correct positions.Faulty locations shall be made good and any damage to the finished floor; tiling, plaster,paint, insulation or terrace shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost.

All materials shall be rust proofed; materials in direct or indirect contact shall becompatible to prevent electrolytic or chemical (bimetallic) corrosion.

Wall flanges shall be provided on all walls, floors, columns etc. wherever supply anddisposal pipes pierce through them. These wall caps shall be or chromium plated brasssnugly fittings and the receiving pipes and shall be large enough to cover the puncturesproperly.

Sanitary appliances, subject to the type of appliance and specific requirements, shall befixed in accordance with the relevant standards and the following:

Contractor shall, during the entire period of installation and afterwards, protect theappliances by providing suitable cover or any other protection so as to absolutelyprevent any damage to the appliances until handing over (The original protectivewrapping shall be left in position for as long as possible)

The appliances shall be placed in correct position or marked out in order that pipework can be fixed or partially fixed first.

The appliance shall be fixed in a manner such that it will facilitate subsequentremoval if necessary.

The appliance shall be securely fixed. Manufacturer's brackets and fixing methodsshall be used wherever possible. Compatible rust proofed fixings shall be used.Fixing shall be done in a manner that minimize noise transmission.

Appliances shall not be bedded (e.g. WC pans, pedestal units) in thick strongmortar that could crack the unit (e.g. ceramic unit)

Pipe connections shall be made with demountable unions. Pipe work shall not befixed in a manner that it supports or partially supports and appliance.

Appliances shall be fixed true to level firmly fixed to anchor or supports providedby the manufacturer and additional anchors or supports where necessary.

Sizes of sanitary fixtures given in the Specifications or in the Bill of Quantities are foridentification with reference to the catalogues of make considered. Dimensions of similarmodels of other makes may very within +_ 10% and the same shall be provided and noclaim for extra payment shall be entertained no shall any payment be deducted on thisaccount.

Samples of Sanitary appliances and fixtures for toilets, chromium plated brass fittings,stainless steel sinks, accessories like towel rods, toilet paper holders, soap dish, liquidsoap dispensers, towel rails coat hooks, hand driers, drinking water fountains etc as listedin the relevant items in the Bill of Quantities shall be approved by the Architect /Consultant/ Engineer prior to installation. The Contractor shall quote his rates for the items in the Billof Quantities accordingly. The rates shall be inclusive of accessories (in such case)required for installation. Bottle traps (for wash basins, sinks, urinals etc) shall be deepseal (Min. 6 cm seal) cast brass bottle traps, heavy chromium plated. All bottle traps shallbe two piece construction to enable removal of the bottom portion for cleaning purpose.


40

3 VITREOUS CHINA SANITARY WARE

3.1.1 Indian Type Water Closet

Squatting pans shall be of white vitreous china conforming to IS : 2556 Part – I forGeneral Requirements and relevant I.S. codes for each pattern as described below :

i) Long pattern – conforming to IS : 2556 (Part – III).

ii) Orissa pattern – conforming to IS : 2556 (Part – III).

The flushing rim and inlet shall be of the self draining type. It shall have weep hole at theflushing inlet to the pan. The flushing inlet shall be in the front, unless otherwise specifiedor ordered by the Engineer-in-charge. The inside of the bottom of the pan shall havesufficient slope from the front towards the outlet and the surface shall be uniform andsmooth to enable easy and quick disposal while flushing. The exterior surface of theoutlet below the flange shall be an unglazed surface which shall have grooves at rightangles to the axis of the outlet. In all cases a pan shall be provided with a (100 mm)S.C.I. trap ‘P’ or ‘S’ type with approximately 50 mm water seal and 50 mm dia vent horn,where required by the Engineer-in-charge or 110 mm dia UPVC WC Connector.

3.1.2 European Type Water Closet

Water closets shall be of white vitreous china conforming to IS : 2556 (Part-I) and 2556(Part-II). The closets shall be of one piece construction. Water Closet shall be siphonicwash down type floor or wall mounted set, as per bill of quantities or as shown in thedrawings. Wall hung WC shall be supported by C. l. floor mounted chair, which shall befixed in a manner as approved by the Engineer.

Each WC set shall be provided with approved quality of seat, rubber buffers andchromium-plated hinges. Seat shall be so fixed that it remains absolutely stationary invertical position without falling down on the WC.

The WC for the disabled toilet shall be complete with grab rail and other accessories asrequired and directed.

3.2 Urinals

Urinals shall be lipped type half stall with glazed vitreous China of size as called for in theBill of Quantities.

Half stall urinals shall be provided with 15mm dia CP spreader, CP domical waste and CPcast brass bottle trap with pipe and wall flange and shall be fixed to wall by Cl brackets, Clwall clips and CP brass screws as recommended by manufacturer complete as directedby the Engineer.

Flush pipes shall be Gl pipes concealed in wall chase but with chromium-plated bends atinlet and outlet.

Gl / PVC waste pipes shall be provided for urinals. Waste pipes may be exposed on wallor concealed in chase as directed by the Engineer.


41

3.3 Urinal Partitions

Urinal partitions shall be white glazed vitreous china of size specified in the Bill ofQuantities or as specified by the Architect in the Architectural drawings.

Porcelain partitions shall be fixed at proper heights with CP brass bolts, anchor fastenersand MS clips as recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Engineer.

3.4 Wash Hand Basin

Washbasins shall be white glazed vitreous china of size, shape and type specified in theBill of Quantities.

Each basin shall be provided with painted MS angle or Cl brackets and clips and thebasin securely fixed to wall/counter slab. Placing of basins over the brackets withoutsecure fixing shall not be accepted. The MS angle shall be provided with two coats of redoxide primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of make, brand and colour asapproved by the Engineer.

Each basin shall be provided with 32mm dia CP waste with overflow, pop-up waste orrubber plug and CP brass chain as specified in the Bill of Quantities, 32mm dia CP brassbottle trap with CP pipe to wall flange.Basins shall be fixed at proper heights as shown on drawings. If heights are not specified,the rim level shall be 800 mm from finished floor level or as directed by the Engineer.

Where oval shape or round shape wash basins are required to be fixed these shall befixed preferably in RCC platform with local available stone topping either fully sunk instone top or flush with the stone topping as directed by Engineer-in-charge.

White glazed pedestals for wash basins, where specified shall be provided. The quality ofthe glazing of the pedestal shall be exactly the same as that of the basin along with whichit is to be installed. It shall be completely recessed at the back to accommodate supplyand waste pipes and fittings. It shall be capable of supporting the basin rigidly andadequately and shall be so designed as to make the height from the floor to top of the rimof basin 75 to 85 cm.

3.5 Sinks

Sinks shall be stainless or any other material as specified in the Bill of Quantities.

Each sink shall be provided with painted MS or Cl brackets and clips and securely fixed.

Counter top sinks shall be fixed with suitable painted angle iron brackets or clips asrecommended by the manufacturer. Each sink shall be provided with 40mm dia CP wasteand rubber plug with CP brass chain as given in the Bill of Quantities.

The MS angle shall be provided with two coats of red oxide primer and two coats ofsynthetic enamel paint of make, brand and colour as approved by the Engineer.

Supply fittings for sinks shall be deck mounted or wall mounted CP swivel faucets with orwithout hot and cold water mixing fittings as specified in the Bill of Quantities. These shallbe measured and paid for separately.


42

3.6 Toilet Paper Holder

Toilet paper holder shall be glazed vitreous china (Colour of the unit shall match with theother fixtures or wall tile) or chrome plated of size, shape and type specified in the Bill ofQuantities.

Porcelain toilet paper holder shall be fixed in walls and set in cement mortar 1:2 (1cement: 2 coarse sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling work.

In case of chrome plated ones the same shall be fixed by means of screws/cappinghaving finish similar to the sanitary fixtures or wall/partitions. When fixed on timberpartition, it shall be fixed on a solid wooden base member provided by the ProjectManager.

3.7 Towel Rail

Tower rail shall be chromium plated brass or of stainless steel or powder coated brass ofsize, shape and type specified in the Bill of Quantities.

Tower rail shall be fixed with screws/capping having finish similar to the towel rail in wallwith rawl plugs or nylon sleeves and shall include cutting and making good as required ordirected by the Engineer.

3.8 Accessories

Porcelain accessories shall be fixed in walls and set in cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2coarse sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling work.

Joints/gaps between all sanitary appliances/fixtures and the floor/walls shall be caulkedwith an approved mildew resistant sealant, having ant fungal properties, of colour andshade to match that of the appliances/fixture and the floor/wall to the extent possible.

3.9 FITTING

All C P bathroom fittings and accessories will be supplied as per the make and modelnumber specified in the BOQ / Or specified by Architect


43

INSTALLATION OF SANITARY FIXTURES AND FITTINGS

a) General

All setting and bedding of sanitary fittings shall be done carefully to suit the required levels.Mortar drops, paint splashes etc. shall be removed from fittings, walls and floors immediatelybefore these get dry.

b) Fixing Water Closet Squatting Pan (Indian Type W.C. pan)

The pan shall be sunk into the floor and embedded in a cushion of average 15 cm cementconcrete 1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 fine sand : 10 graded stone aggregate/ brick aggregate 40 mmnominal size) as specified. This concrete shall be left 115 mm below the top level of the pan soas to allow for flooring and its bed concrete. The floor should be suitably sloped so that thewastewater is drained into the pan. The pan shall be provided with a 100 mm `p' or s trap asrequired in the item with a approximately 50 mm seal. The joint between the pan and the trapshall be made leak proof with cement mortar 1:1 (1 cement :1 fine sand).

c) Fixing Wash down Water Closet (European Type W.C. pan)

The closet shall be fixed to the floor by means of 75 mm long 6.5 mm diameter counter sunkbolts and nuts embedded in the floor concrete using rubber or fiber washers so as notto allow any lateral displacement. The joint between the trap of W.C. and soilpipe shall be made with cement mortar 1:1 (1cement : 1 fine sand).

d) Fixing Foot rest

After laying the floor, as specified, a pair of foot rest of size 250mm X 130mm X 30mm of whitevitreous china shall be set in cement mortar 1 : 3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand). The footrestshall be fixed at a distance of 175mm from the inner edge of the back side of the pan and shallbe fixed at convenient angle.

e) Fixing flushing Cistern

The cistern shall be fixed on two C.I. or mild steel brackets which shall be firmly embedded in thewall in cement mortar 1 : 4 (1 cement : 4 fine sand).

The height of the bottom of the cistern from the top of the pan shall be 2 meters for high level and30cm. for low level cistern.

f) Fixing over flow pipe

The cistern shall be provided with 25mm nominal bore galvanized mild steel over flow pipe withfittings, which shall terminate into a brass perforated mosquito proof cap and at 6" above flowlevel of the W.C. room.

g) Fixing flush pipe and its connection


44

Low level flushing cistern

In case of low level flushing cistern it shall be connected to the closet by means of 40mmdia white porcelain enameled flush bend using Indian rubber adapters joint. The otherspecification shall be the same as described at (i) above.

h) Fixing plastic seat and cover

The seat shall be fixed to the pan by means of two 8mm dia corrosion resistant hinge bolts with aminimum length of shank of 65mm and threaded to within 15mm of the head. Each bolt shallbe provided with two suitably shaped washers of rubber or other similar material for adjustingthe level of the seat while fixing it to the closet. In addition one 8mm nonferrous metal or stain-less steel washer shall be provided with each bolt. The maximum diameter of the washers fixedon the under side of the pan shall not be greater than 25mm. One arm of the hinge in each boltshall be fixed to the under site of the seal by three nos. 20mm long No.6 gauge wood screws.The other arm of the hinge shall be fixed to the under side of the cover flush with the surface bymeans of 3 nos. 10mm long No. 6 gauge wood screws.

i) Fixing bowl pattern urinals

Urinals shall be fixed in position by using wooden plugs and screws, and shall be at a height of65cm. From the floor level to the top of the lip of urinal, unless otherwise directed. The woodenplugs shall be fixed in the wall in cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 fine sand).

j) Fixing wash basins and kitchen sink

The basin shall be supported on a pair of R.S. or C.I. brackets fixed in cement mortar 1:3 (1cement : 3 coarse sand). The R.S. or C.I. brackets shall conform to IS 775-1962. The wall plasteron the rear shall be cut to rest over the top edge of the basin. After fixing the basin plaster shallbe made good and surface finished to match with the existing one.

The C.P. brass trap and unions shall be connected to 32mm dia waste pipe which shall besuitably bent towards the wall and which shall discharge into an open drain leading to a gully trapor direct into the gully trap, on the ground floor and shall be connected to a waste pipe stackthrough a floor trap on the upper floors. C.P. brass trap and union may not be provided where thesurface drain or a floor trap is placed directly under the basin and the waste is discharged in to itvertically.

k) Fixing Mirror

The mirror shall be mounted on asbestos sheet or plywood sheet and shall be fixed in position bymeans of 4 C.P. brass screws and C.P. brass washers over rubber washers and wooden plugsfirmly embedded in the wall.

The height of the bottom edge of the mirror shall generally be 120cm above the floor level unlessotherwise specified or shown in drawing. Unless otherwise specified the longer sides shall befixed horizontally.


45

l) Fixing glass shelf unit

The bracket of the unit shall be fixed with C.P. brass screws to wooden plugs firmly embedded inthe wall with cement mortar 1 : 3 ( 1 cement : 3 coarse sand).

The height of the glass shelf above the floor level shall 115cm unless otherwise specified orshown in drawings.

m) Fixing towel rail

The brackets of the wall rail shall be fixed by means of C.P. brass screws to wooden plugs firmlyembedded in the wall with cement 1 : 3 ( 1 cement : 3 coarse sand).

The height of the towel rail above the floor level shall be 75cm unless otherwise specified orshown in drawings.

n) Fixing toilet paper holders

It shall be fixed in a position by means of screws and wooden plugs embedded in the wall withcement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand).

a) FITTING

Contractor shall install all chromium plated, stainless steel or powder coated brass fittingsas shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer and given in the Bill ofQuantities.

All CP accessories shall be fixed with CP brass half round head screws and cup washersif required in wall with rawl plugs or nylon sleeves and shall include cutting and makinggood as required or as directed by the Engineer.

The fittings shall be supplied complete with chromium plated matching flanges, wall coverplates, nuts and extension pieces of required lengths. Metallic washers where requiredshall also be of chromium plated brass. All bib cocks and stopcocks shall conform toIndian Standard IS: 781. Brass screw down pillar taps shall conform to IS: 1701 and allother fittings shall match the supply fitting in construction and appearance. All fixingaccessories and screws shall be similar to fittings. All washers shall conform to IndianStandard IS: 4346.

All waste fittings (Waste, Chain, Overflow, Spreader Caps etc.) shall be of brass / copperheavy chromium plated of the make and design specified and match the supply fittings.They shall conform to Indian Standard IS:2963.

The flushing system of the EWC shall be with 32 mm control cock and elbow set completewith adjustable sleeves and wall flanges. The flush valve for EWC shall be in conformitywith IS: 6249.

p) TESTING

All appliances, fixtures and fittings shall be tested before and after installation. Waterseals of all appliances shall be tested.


46

q) MOCKUP AND TRIAL ASSEMBLY

The installation of the Sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be as per the shop drawingsapproved by the Engineer.

The contractor shall make a mock up toilet in consultation with the Engineer. The sanitaryfixtures and fittings shall be got approved by the Engineer prior to the procurement. Oncompletion of the mock up, changes if any required shall be carried out to the satisfactionof the Engineer. Relevant instructions from manufacturers shall be followed as applicable.This trial assembly shall be developed to determine the location of cut outs in the buildingstructure, holding devices etc. which will be required for final installation of all sanitaryfixtures and fittings.

The fixtures in the trial assembly can be re-used for final installation without any additionalpayments for fixing or dismantling of the fixtures.

The contractor shall provide all the necessary supporting and fixing devices to install thesanitary fixtures and fittings securely in position. The fixing devices shall be rigidlyanchored into the building structure. The devices shall be rust resistant and shall be sofixed that they do not present an unsightly appearance in the final assembly. Where thelocation demands, the Engineer may instruct the contractor to provide chromium plated orother similarly finished fixing devices. In such circumstances the contractor shall arrangeto supply the fixing devices and shall be installed complete with appropriate vibrationisolating pads, washers and gaskets.

r) FINAL INSTALLATION

The contractor shall install all sanitary fixtures and fittings in their final position inaccordance with approved trial assemblies and as shown on drawings. The installationshall be complete with all supply and waste connections. The connection betweenbuilding and piping system and the sanitary fixtures shall be through proper unions andflanges to facilitate removal/replacement of sanitary fixtures without disturbing the built inpiping system. All unions and flanges shall match in appearance with other exposedfittings.

Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and to alignment. The outlets of water closet pansand similar appliances shall be examined to ensure that outlet ends are butting on thereceiving pipes before making the joints. It shall be ensured that the receiving pipes areclear of obstruction. When fixtures are being mounted, attention shall be paid to thepossibility of movement and settlement by other causes. Overflows shall be made toensure that necessary anchoring devices have been provided for supporting waterclosets, washbasins, sinks and other appliances.


47

s) PROTECTION AGAINST DAMAGE

The contractor shall take every precaution to protect all sanitary fixtures against damage,misuse, cracking, staining, breakage and pilferage by providing proper wrapping andlocking arrangement till the completion of the installation. At the time of handing over, thecontractor shall clean, disinfect and polish all the fixtures and fittings. Any fixtures andfittings found damaged, cracked chipped stained or scratched shall be removed and newfixtures and fittings free from defects shall be installed at his own cost to complete thework.

t) MEASUREMENT AND RATES

Sanitary fixtures (Vitreous China ware and CP fittings) shall be measured by numbers.

Rate of providing and fixing of sanitary fixtures, accessories, shall be include all items,and operations stated in the respective specifications and Bill of Quantities and nothingextra is payable.

Rates of all items under specification clauses above shall be inclusive of cutting holes andchases and making good the same, CP brass screws, nuts, bolts and any other fixingarrangements required and recommended by manufacturers, testing and commissioningetc. complete.


48

LAYING AND JOINTING OF SEWER AND DRAIN PIPES AND FITTINGS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

UNLOADING :

(e) The pipes shall be unloaded where they are required.

(f) Unloading (except where mechanical handling facilities are available) – pipesweighing upto 60 kg shall be handled by two persons by hand passing. Heavierpipes shall be unloaded from the lorry or wagon by holding them in loops, formedwith ropes and sliding over planks set not steeper than 45 degree. The planksshall be sufficiently rigid and two ropes shall always be used to roll the pipesdown the planks. The ropes should be tied on the side opposite the unloading.Only one pipe shall be unloaded at a time.

(g) Under no circumstances shall be the pipes be thrown down from the carriers orbe dragged or rolled along hard surfaces.

(h) The pipes shall be checked for any visible damage (such as broken edges,cracking or spalling of pipe) while unloading and shall be sorted out forreclamation. Any pipe which shows sufficient damage to preclude it from beingused shall be discarded.

STORING :

(d) The pipes and specials shall be handled with sufficient care to avoid damage tothem. These shall be lined up on one side of the alignment of the trench socketfacing upgrade when line runs uphill and upstream when lines run on levelground.

(e) Each stack shall contain pipes of same class and size, consignment or batchnumber and particulars of the suppliers, wherever possible, shall be marked onthe stack.

(f) Storage shall be done on firm, level and clean ground. Wedges shall be providedat the bottom layer to keep the stack stable.

CUTTING :

(c) Cutting of pipes may be necessary when pipes are to be laid in lengths shorterthan the lengths supplied, such as while replacing accessories like tees, bends,etc. at fixed position in the pipe lines.

(d) A line shall be marked around the pipe with a chalk piece at the point where it isto be cut. The line shall be so marked that the cut is truly at right angle to thelongitudinal axis of the pipe.


49

TRENCHES :

(a) The trenches shall be so dug that the pipes may be laid to the required alignmentand at required depth.

(b) The minimum width of the trench should be “D + 400 mm”, where, D is outerdiameter of the pipe.

(c) The bed of the trench, if in soft or made up earth, shall be well watered andrammed before laying the pipes and the depressions, if any, shall be properlyfilled with earth and consolidated in 20 cm layer.

(d) If the trench bottom is extremely hard or rocky or loose stony soil, the trench shallbe excavated at least 150 mm below the trench grade. Rocks, stone or otherhard substances from the bottom of the trench shall be removed and the trenchbrought back to the required grade by filling with selected fine earth or sand (orfine moorum if fine soil or sand is not available locally) and compacted so as toprovide a smooth bedding for the pipe or provide lean cement concrete asrequired and specified..

(e) After the excavation of the trench is completed, hollows shall be cut at therequired position to receive the socket of the pipes and these hollows shall be ofsufficient depth to ensure that the barrels of the pipes shall rest throughout theirentire length on the solid ground and that sufficient spaces left for jointing theunderside of the pipe joint. These socket holes shall be refilled with sand afterjointing the pipe.

(f) Roots of trees within a distance of about 0.5 meter from the side of the pipe lineshall be removed or killed.

(g) The excavated materials shall not be placed within 1 meter or half of the depth ofthe trench, whichever is greater, from the edge of the trench. The materialsexcavated shall be separated and stacked so that in refilling that may be re-laidand compacted in the same order to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

(h) The trench shall be kept free from water. Shoring and timbering shall be providedwherever required. Excavation below water table shall be done after dewateringthe trenches.

(i) Where the pipe line or drain crosses an existing road, the road crossing shall beexcavated half at a time, the 2nd half being commenced after the pipes havebeen laid in the first half and the trench refilled. Necessary safety measures fortraffic as directed shall be adopted. All types, water main cables, etc. met withinthe course of excavation shall be carefully protected and supported. Care shallbe taken not to disturb the electrical and communication cable met with duringcourse of excavation, removal of which, if necessary, shall be arranged by theEngineer-in-charge.

(j) When pipes are laid under road and pavements, subjected to heavy traffic loads,the trench may be covered with RCC slabs of suitable dimensions.


50

LAYING :

(d) The pipes shall be lowered into the trench by means of suitably pulley blocks,sheer legs chains ropes etc. In no case the pipes shall be rolled and dropped intothe trench. One end of each rope may be tied to a wooden or steel peg driveninto the ground and the other end held by men which when slowly released willlower the pipe into the trench. After lowering, the pipes shall be arranged so thatthe spigot of one pipe is carefully centered into the socket of the next pipe, andpushed to the full distance that it can go. The pipe line shall be laid to the levelsrequired. Specials shall also be laid in their proper position as stated above.

(e) Where so directed, the pipes and specials may be laid on masonry or concretepillars. The pipe laid on the level ground, shall be laid with socket facing thedirection of flow of water.

(f) In unstable soils, such as soft soils and dry lumpy soils it shall be checkedwhether the soils can support the pipe lines and if required suitable specialfoundation shall be provided.

BACK FILLING AND TAMPING :

(e) Back filling shall follow pipe installation as closely as possible to protect pipe fromfalling boulders, eliminating possibility of lifting of the pipe due to flooding of opentrench and shifting pipe out of line by caved in soil.

(f) The initial back fill material used shall be free of large stones and dry lumps.

(g) The initial back fill shall be placed evenly in a layer of about 100 mm thick. Thisshall be properly consolidated and this shall be continued till there is a cushion ofat least 300 mm of cover over the pipe.

(h) If it is desired to observe the joint or coupling during the testing of mains theyshall be left exposed. Sufficient back fill shall be placed on the pipe to resist themovement due to pressure while testing.


51

GLAZED STONE WARE PIPES & FITTINGS

a) MATERIAL :

(i) STONE WARE PIPES AND FITTINGS :

All pipes with spigot and socket ends and fittings shall conform to IS : 651. Theseshall be sound, free from visible defects such as fire cracks or hair cracks. Theglaze of the pipes shall be free from crazing. The pipes shall give a sharp cleartone when struck with a light hammer. There shall be no broken blisters. Thethickness of pipes shall be as given in the Table below :

TABLE

Internal diameterMm

Thickness of the barrel and socketmm

100 12150 16200 17

The length of pipes shall be 60,75,90 cm exclusive of the internal depth ofsocket. The pipes shall be handled with sufficient care to avoid damage to them.

b) TRENCHES :

(i) The trenches shall be so dug that the pipes may be laid to the required alignmentand at required depth.

(ii) Cover shall be measured from top of pipe to the surface of the ground.

(iii) The width of the trench shall be D+400 mm with a minimum of 750 mm. (D=External diameter of pipe). Note : The width should not be more than thementioned for structural safety of the pipes.

(iv) The bed of the trench, if in soft or made up earth, shall be well watered andrammed before laying the pipes and the depressions, if any, shall be properlyfilled with earth and consolidated in 20 cm layer.

(v) If the trench bottom is extremely hard or rocky or loose stony soil, the trench shallbe excavated at least 150 mm below the trench grade. Rocks, stone or otherhard substances from the bottom of the trench shall be removed and the trenchbrought back to the required grade by filling with selected fine earth or sand (orfine moorum if fine soil or sand is not available locally) and compacted so as toprovide a smooth bedding for the pipe.

(vi) After the excavation of the trench is completed, hollows shall be cut at therequired position to receive the socket of the pipes and these hollows shall be ofsufficient depth to ensure that the barrels of the pipes shall rest throughout theirentire length on the solid ground and that sufficient spaces left for jointing theunderside of the pipe joint. These socket holes shall be refilled with sand afterjointing the pipe.

(vii) Roots of trees within a distance of about 0.5 meter from the side of the pipe lineshall be removed or killed.


52

(viii) The excavated materials shall not be placed within 1 meter or half of the depth ofthe trench, whichever is greater, from the edge of the trench. The materialsexcavated shall be separated and stacked so that in refilling that may be re-laidand compacted in the same order to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

(ix) The trench shall be kept free from water. Shoring and timbering shall be providedwherever required. Excavation below water table shall be done after rewateringthe trenches.

(x) Where the pipe line or drain crosses an existing road, the road crossing shall beexcavated half at a time, the 2nd half being commenced after the pipes have beenlaid in the first half and the trench refilled. Necessary safety measures for trafficas directed shall be adopted. All types, water main cables, etc. met within thecourse of excavation shall be carefully protected and supported. Care shall betaken not to disturb the electrical and communication cable met with duringcourse of excavation, removal of which, if necessary, shall be arranged by theEngineer-in-charge.

c) CONCRETE SUPPORT :

i) BEDDING :

Bedding shall be rectangular in section and shall extend laterally at least 15cm beyondand on both sides of the projection of the barrel of the pipe. The thickness of theconcrete below the barrel of the pipe shall be 10cm for pipes under 150mm diameterand 15cm for pipes 150mm and over in diameter. Where bedding is used alone theconcrete shall be brought up at least to the invert level of the pipe to form a cradleand to avoid lime contact between the pipe and the bed.

The width of the bedding shall be external diameter of the pipe plus

(a) 30cm upto trench depth of 1.2 meter.

(b) 40cm for trench depth more than 1.2 meter.

ii) HAUNCHING

Concrete haunching shall consist of :

a) Concrete bed as described for bedding in (i) above.

b) The full width of the bed carried upto the level of the horizontal level of thepipe; and

c) Splays from this level carried up on both sides of the pipe; from the full width ofthe bed to meet the pipe barrel tangentially.

iii) SURROUND OR ENCASING

Surround or encasing shall be similar to haunching upto the horizontal diameter ofthe pipe and top portion over this shall be finished in a semi circular form to give auniform encasing for the top half of the pipe.


53

d) LAYING :

The pipe shall be laid accurately and perfectly true to line, levels and gradients. Great careshall be taken to prevent sand etc. from entering the pipes. The pipes between two manholesshall be laid truly in a straight line without vertical or horizontal undulation. All junction andchanges in direction and diameter shall be made inside manholes by means of curves taperedchannels formed in cement concrete finished smooth and benched on both sides. The body ofthe pipe shall, for its entire length, rest on an even level of concrete, grips being made or left inthe bed to receive the sockets of the pipes. Normally the sockets ends should face theupstream. When the line runs up hill the socket ends should face the upgrade.

All pipes shall be laid on a bed of cement or lime concrete with thickness and mix as specified,projecting on each side of the pipe to the specified width of the trench. The pipes with their crownlevel at 1.20 m depth and less from ground shall be covered with 15 cm thick. Concrete above thecrown of the pipe and sloped off to meet the outer edges of the concrete, to give a minimumthickness of 15 cm all – around the pipe. Pipes laid at a depth greater than 1.20 m at crown shallbe concreted at the sides upto the level of the center of the pipe and sloped off from the edges tomeet the pipe tangentially.

e) JOINTING GLAZED STONE WARE PIPES :

Tarred gasket or yarn soaked in neat cement slurry shall first be placed round the spigot of eachpipe and spigot shall then be placed well home into the socket of pipe previously laid. Thepipe shall then be adjusted and fixed in the correct position and the gasket caulked tightly homeso as to fill not more than one forth of the total depth of the socket.

The remainder of the socket shall be filled with a stiff mixture of cement mortar proportion of 1part of cement and 1 part of fine sand. When the socket is filled, a fillet shall be formed roundthe joint with a trowel, forming an angle of 45 degree with the barrel of the pipe.

Mortar shall be mixed as necessary for immediate use and no set mortar shall be beaten up andused before it has begun to set.

After the joint is made, any extraneous material shall be removed from the inside of the joints witha suitable scrapper or '. The newly made joints shall be protected, until set, from the sun, drywinds, rain or frost. Sacking or other suitable materials, which shall be kept damp, may be usedfor the purpose.

The approximate quantity of cement required for each joint for following sizes of pipesare given below for guidance.

Nominal dia of pipe (mm) Cement (Kg)100 1.00150 1.50200 2.00250 2.50


54

f) JOINTING CAST IRON PIPES WITH STONE WARE PIPES :

Where any cast iron soil pipe, waste pipe, ventilating pipe or trap is connected with a stoneware pipe or drain communicating with a sewer, the bedded spigot end of such cast iron soilpipe, waste pipe ventilating pipe or trap shall be inserted into a socket of such stone warepipe or drain and the joint made with mortar consisting of 1 part of Portland cement and 1 partof clean sharp sand after placing a tarred gasket or hemp yarn soaked in neat cement slurryround the joint and inserted in it by means of a caulking tools.

g) CURING :

The mortar joints shall be cured at least for 7 days before testing.

h) TESTING OF JOINTS :

HYDRAULIC TEST :

The pipes shall be subjected to a pressure of at least 2.5meter head of water at thehighest point of the section under test. The test shall be carried out by suitablyplugging the low end of the drain and the ends of the connection, if any and filling thesystem with water. A knuckle bend shall be temporarily jointed in at the top end and asufficient length of vertical pipe jointed to it so as to provide the required test head; orthe top end may be plugged with a connection to a hose ending in a funnel which couldbe raised or lowered till the required head is obtained and fix suitably forobservation. Subsidence of the test water may be done to one or the more of thefollowing causes :-

i) Absorption by pipes and joints;

ii) Sweating of pipes or joints;

iii) Leakage at joints or from defective pipes and

iv) Trapped air.

Allowance shall be made for (i) above by adding water until absorption has ceased afterwhich the proper test should commence if any leakage is visible the defective part of the workshould be made good. A slight amount of sweating which is uniform may be over looked butexcessive sweating from a particular pipe or joint shall be watched for as taken as indicating adefect to be made good.

RECTIFICATION OF FAULTY JOINTS :

Any joint leaking or sweating shall be rectified or embedded into into 150mm layer ofcement concrete (1:2:4) 300mm in length and the section retested.


55

S. W. GULLY TRAP

a) MATERIAL :

S.W. Gully Trap :

Gully traps shall conform to IS : 651. These shall be sound, free from visible defectssuch as fire cracks, or hair cracks. The glaze of the traps shall be free from crazing.They shall given a sharp clear tone when struck with light hammer. There shall be nobroken blisters.

Each gully trap shall have one C.I. grating of square size corresponding to thedimensions of inlet of gully trap. It will also have a water tight C.I. cover with frame insidedimensions 300 x 300 mm the cover weighing not less than 4.50 kg and the frame notless than 2.70 kg. The grating, cover and frame shall be of sound and good casting andshall have truly square machined seating faces.

b) EXCAVATION :

The excavation for gully traps shall be done true to dimensions and levels as indicated on plansor as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

c) FIXING :

The gully trap be fixed over cement concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 fine sand : 10 graded stoneaggregate 40 mm nominal size) foundation 650 mm square and 100 mm thick. The jointing ofgully outlet to the branch drain shall be done similar to jointing of S.W. pipes as describedabove.

d) BRICK MASONRY CHAMBER :

After fixing and testing gully and branch drain, a brick masonry chamber 300 mm x 300 mm (inside) with bricks in cement mortar 1:5 ( 1 cement : 5 fine sand) shall be built with a 100 mm brickwork round the gully trap from the top of the bed concrete upto ground level.The space between the chamber walls and the trap shall be filled with cement concrete1:5:10 ( 1 cement : 5 fine sand : 10 graded stone aggregate 10 nominal size). The upperportion of the chamber i.e. above the top level of the trap shall be plastered in side withcement mortar 1:3 ( 1 cement : 3 sand), finished with a floating coat of neat cement. The cornersand bottoms of the chamber shall be rounded off so as to slop towards grating.

C.I. cover with frame 300 mm x 300 mm (inside) size small then be fixed on the top of the brickmasonry with cement concrete 1:2:4 ( 1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate20 mm nominal size) 40 mm thick and rendered smooth. The finish top of the cover shall be leftabout 40 mm above the adjoining ground level so as to exclude the surface water from enteringthe gully trap.


56

MANHOLES

i) GENERAL :

Manholes of different types and sizes specified shall be constructed in the sewer line atsuch places and to such levels and dimensions as shown in the drawing or as directed by theEngineer-in-charge. The size specified shall indicate the insidedimensions (between wall faces) of the manholes. The branch sewer should deliver sewagein the manhole in direction of main flow and the junction must be made with case so that flow inthe main is not impeded.

No drain from house fitting i.e. gully taps or soil pipes etc. to manholes shall normally exceed alength of 6 meter unless it is unavoidable.

At every change of alignment, gradient or diameter of a drain, there shall be a manhole orinspection chamber. Bends and junctions in the drains shall be grouped together in manhole asfar as possible. The maximum distance between manholes shall be 45 m for up to 300 mm dia,75 meter for 350 to 500 mm dia and 90 meter for 600 mm dia and above.

Where the diameter of the drain is increased, the crown of the pipe shall be fixed at the samelevel and necessary slope given in the invert of the manhole chamber.

Manholes shall be built to the following specifications :-

a) Bed concrete :

The manhole shall be built on a bed of cement concrete 1:4:8 (1 cement : 4coarse sand: 8 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) The thickness ofBed Concrete shall be 150 mm upto 0.90 meter depth, 200 mm thick formanholes from 0.90 meter to 2.25 meter depth and 30 mm for manholes ofabove 2.25 meter depth.

b) Walls :

The walls of the manholes shall be of brick masonry. The brick masonry shallbe with bricks in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) ofbrick work shall be carefully built in English bond. The jointing face ofeach brick being well buttered with cement mortar before laying so as toensure a full joint. The thickness of wall shall not be less than 230mm upto 2.25meter in depth, 345 mm thick for depth 2.25 to 3.0 meter, 460 mm thick fordepths 3.0 m to 5.0 meter and 575 mm thick for 5.0 to 8.0 meter depth. Forgreater depths and for subsoil water conditions the exact thickness of wall shallbe governed by the structural design & site conditions.

c) Plaster :

The inside of wall shall be plastered by 12 mm thick with cement mortar 1:3 (1cement : 3 coarse sand) and finished with a floating coat of neat cement. Allangle shall be rounded to 7.5 cm. radius and all rendered internal surfacesshall have impervious finish obtained by using a steel trowel.

Where the saturated soil is met with, also the external surface of the walls of themanhole shall be plastered with 12 mm thick cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement : 3coarse sand) finished smooth upto 30 cm above the highest sub-soil water levelwith the approval of the Engineer-in-charge. The plaster shall further be waterproofed with addition of approved water proofing compound in a quantity as permanufacturer’s specifications.


57

d) Channels and benching :

Channels shall be semi circular in the bottom half and of diameter equal tothe sewer. Above the horizontal diameter, the sides shall be extended verticallyto the same level as the crown of the out going pipe and the top edge shall besuitably rounded off. The branch channels shall also be similarly constructedwith respect to the benching but at their junction with the mainchannel on appropriate shall suitably rounded off in the direction of flow inthe main channel shall be given.

The channels and benching shall be done in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1cement : 2coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) rising at a slope of1 in 6 from the edges of channel. The channels of the bottom of the chambershall be finished with the floating coat of neat cement.

e) Foot Rests :

All manholes deeper than 0.8 m shall be provided with C. I. foot rests. Theseshall be embedded 20 cm deep in 20 x 20 x 10 cm blocks of cement concrete1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominalsize). The concrete block with C.I. foot rest placed in its center shall be cast insitu along with the masonry and surface finished with 12 mm thick cement plaster1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) finished smooth.

Foot rests which shall be of 20 x 20 sq. C.I. bars shall be fixed 30 cm apartvertically and staggered laterally and shall project 10 cm beyond the surface ofthe wall. The top foot rest shall be 45 cm below the manhole cover.

Foot rests shall be painted with coal tar, the portion embedded in the cementconcrete block being painted with thick cement slurry before fixing.

f) Cover slabs :

These shall be of R.C.C. 1:1.5:3 (1 cement :1.5 coarse sand : 3graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) 15 cm thick with surface andedge finished fair. Full bearing equal to the width of the wall shall be given tothe slab on all sides. The frame of the man hole cover shall be embeddedfirmly in the R.C.C. slab so that the top of the frame remains flush with the topof the R.C.C. slab. Where the opening of manhole is only 560 mm dia, the MHcover shall be fixed in 150 mm thick PCC (1:2:4).

ii) TESTING :

Manholes shall be tested by filling with water to a depth not exceeding 1.2 meter as directed bythe Engineer-in-charge.

After completion of the work manhole covers shall be sealed by means of thick grease.

iii) CONNECTION TO A EXISTING SEWER :

The connection to an existing sewer shall, as far as possible, be done at the manholes. Where itis unavoidable to make connection in between two manholes, the work of breaking into theexisting sewer and forming the connection shall be carried out under the supervisionAdministrative Authority.


58

Breaking of sewer shall be effected by the cautions enlargement of sewer hole and everyprecaution shall be taken to prevent any material from entering the sewer. No connection shallbe former in such a way so as to constitute a projection into the sewer or to cause anydiminutions in its effective size.

iv) DROP CONNECTIONS :

Where it is uneconomic or impracticable to arrange the connection within 600 mm height abovethe invert of the manhole, the connection shall be made by constructing a vertical shaft outsidethe manholes chamber. If the difference in the levels between the incoming drain and the sewerdoes not exceed 600 mm and there is sufficient room in the manhole, the connection pipemay be directly brought through the manhole wall and the fall accommodated byconstructing a ramp in the benching of the manhole.


59

PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE COVERS & FRAMES

Precast reinforced cement concrete manhole covers intended for use in sewerage, drainage andwater works shall generally conform to IS : 12592 - 2002. Detailed specification are as under :

1. GRADES : TYPES & USES

Manhole covers and frames shall be of the following four grades and types :

Grades Grade Designation Type / shape of coverLight Duty LD – 2.5 Rectangular, Square, Circular

Medium Duty MD – 10 Rectangular, CircularHeavy Duty HD – 20 Circular-Square, Rectangular,

Extra Heavy Duty EHD – 35 Circular, Square, Rectangular,

2. The different grades and types of manhole covers may be used as follows :

a) LD – 2.5 Rectangular, Square or Circular types :

These are suitable for use within residential and institutional complexes / areaswith pedestrian but occasional LMV traffic. These covers may also be used forinspection chambers.

b) MD – 10 :

These are suitable for use in service lanes / roads, car parking areas etc.

c) MD – 20 :

Suitable for use in institutional/commercial areas / carriage ways with heavy dutyvehicular traffic like buses, trucks, etc. for a wheel load between 50 to 100 KN.

d) EHD – 35 : Circular, square, or rectangular (scrapper manhole) types -

These are suitable for use on carriage way in commercial industrial / port areas /near warehouses / godowns where frequent loading and unloading of trucks /trailers are common, with slow to fast moving vehicular traffic of the types havingwheel loads upto 115 KN, irrespective of the location of the manhole chambers.

3. MATERIALS :

(i) Cement :

cement used for the manufacture of precast concrete manhole covers shallconform to IS : 269 or 455 or 1489 or 6909 or IS : 8041 or IS : 8043 or IS : 8112.

(ii) Aggregates :


60

The aggregates used shall be clean and free from deleterious matter and shallconform to the requirements of IS: 383–1970.The aggregates shall be wellgraded and the nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 20mm.

(iii) Concrete :

The mix proportions of concrete shall be determined by the manufacturer andshall be such as will produce a dense concrete without voids, honey combing etc.(IS : 456) The minimum cement content in the concrete shall be 360 kg/m3 with amaximum water cement ratio of 0.45. Concrete weaker than grade M-30 (designmix) shall not be used. Compaction of concrete shall be done by machinevibration.

(iv) Reinforcement :

a) The reinforcement steel shall conform to Grade A of IS : 2062 or IS 432(Part I) or IS : 432 (Part 2) or IS : 1786 as appropriate.

Reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose mills scale, loose rust,and mud, oil, grease or any other coating which may reduce or destroythe bond between the concrete and steel. A light film of rust may not beregarded as harmful but steel shall not be visibly pitted by rust.

b) Fibers steel : In association with in the main steel bars reinforcementsteel fibers of appropriate types and forms may also be used assecondary reinforcement (upto 0.5% by volume).

4. SHAPES AND DIMENSIONS :

(i) Shapes :

The shapes of precast concrete manhole covers shall be square, rectangular orcircular as specified.

(ii) Dimensions :

Dimensions of precast concrete manhole covers shall be as given in Tablebelow, the minimum clearance at top between the frame and cover shall be 5mm.


61

TABLE

S.No.

Description Heavy / Extra HeavydutyHD / EHD

Medium dutyM.D.

Light dutyL.D.

1. Clear openingmatching the topopening of manhole

560 mm dia or600 mm dia orsquareor 560 mm

450 mm dia.480 mm dia.500 mm dia.dia or square

600 x 450 mm(rectangular) 450 mm diaor 350 mmdia or square

2. Precast slab withintegral frame (D/T)

900 mm dia x 180 mmor square corners cut1000 mm dia x 200 mmor square corner cut

800 mm.dia x 130 mm800 mm diax 150 mm

850mmx700mmx100mm625mm dia x 100 mm or575 mm dia x100 mm or square

3. Thickness of coverdepth of frame (T1)

100 mm or110 / 120 mm

70 / 80 mm 50 mm

4. MatchingManholeCover (B)

685 / 660 mm or735 / 710 mm diaor square

585 mm dia or645 mm dia orsquare

685 x 535 mm515 mm dia or square435 mm dia or square

5. Edge protection ofcovers/lifting facility

Precast manhole covers are designed and provided with MS rims of2.5 mm thickness welded around with provision of two lifting hookswelded at appropriate locations.

6. Chequered patternon operativesurface

The MS rims along with the edges of precast manhole covers andtheir operative surface are suitably coated/finished using corrosionresistant paint.

7. Marking on thecovers

Precast manhole covers/precast slabs are suitably marked on theoperative surface with the following letters, unless specified otherwise

Name of the Department/Sewer or SWD/Grade/Date of MFR/TradeName etc.

8. Performancerequirements

Test load

When tested for ULTIMATE breaking load using 300 mm dia block asper the method described in IS : 12592 (Part I) manhole covers shallbe within the following range :

Light duty - 2.5 tones (L.D. – 2.5) Heavy duty – 20 tones (HD – 20)Medium duty - 10 tones (MD – 10) Extra heavy duty - 35 tones(EHD – 35).

5. LIFTING DEVICE :

The minimum diameter of mild steel rod used as lifting device shall be 10 mm for lightand 12 mm for medium duty covers and 16 mm for heavy and extra heavy duty covers.The lifting device shall be protected from corrosion by not galvanizing or epoxy coating orany other suitable.

6. FINISHING AND COATING :

To prevent any possible damage from corrosion of steel the underside of the covers shallbe treated with anticorrosive paint. The top surface of the covers shall be given achequered finish.

In order to protect the edges of the covers from possible damage at the time of lifting andhandling it is necessary that the manhole covers shall be cast with a protective mild steelsheet of minimum 2.5 mm thickness around the periphery of the covers. Exposed surfaceof mild steel sheet shall be given suitable treatment with anticorrosive paint or coating.


62

7. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS :

a) General :

All units shall be sound and free from cracks and other defects which interfacewith the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of theunits. Minor chipping at the edge / surface resulting from the customary methodsof handling during delivery shall not be deemed for rejecting.

b) Load test :

The breaking load of individual units when tested in accordance with the methoddescribed in IS : 12592 shall be not less than the values specified in Table below.

TABLE

Grade ofcover

Type Load in Tones Diameter of Blocksin mm

EHD – 35 Circular, Square orRectangular

35 300

HD – 20 Circular, Square orRectangular

20 300

MD – 10 Circular, orRectangular

10 300

LD – 2.5 Rectangular, Squareor Circular

2.5 300

8. FIXING :

The frames of manhole shall be firmly embedded to correct alignment and level in RCCslab or plain concrete as the case may be on the top of masonry which shall be paid asextra unless specified otherwise.


63


INTERNAL ELECTRICAL WORKS

Internal & External electrical works will be carried out as per CPWDspecifications and will be paid accordingly.

A. CABLES

MEDIUM VOLTAGE 1.1 kV GRADE XLPE INSULATED / PVC INSULATED CABLES

1. GENERAL

The MV cables shall be supplied, inspected, laid, tested and commissioned inaccordance with drawings, Specifications, relevant Indian Standard and cablemanufacturer's instruction.

2. MATERIAL

Specifications of PVC insulated, sheathed aluminum / copper conductor cableshall be as follows:

a. Conductor

Stranded compacted circular conductor shall be of electrical grade high conductivityaluminum/ copper conductor as per IS: 8130 / 84.

b. Insulation

The insulation shall be compounded PVC, application shall be by extrusion processinsulation type C (85deg.C) conforming to IS: 5831-1984. The thickness of insulation willbe as per the relevant Indian codes.

c. Laying-up


64

Insulated conductors of multi core cables shall be with thermoplastic fillers in theinterstices. The phase identification of cores shall be by colored strips.

d. Inner Sheath

Cores shall be surrounded either by a wrapped or an extruded PVC sheath. Thethickness of the inner sheath shall be as per relevant Indian codes.

e. Armouring

The armouring shall be provided over the inner sheath. Single core cable shall have non-magnetic armouring. Multi core cables shall have either galvanized round steel wires orflat steel strip armouing. Steel wires and strips for armouring confirm to IS: 3975. Thedirection of lay of armouring shall be opposite to that of cores.

f. Outer Sheath

Single and multi core cables are provided with an extruded PVC outer-sheath. Thethickness of the sheath shall be as per IS: 1554-1988. The PVC compound for the outer-sheath shall confirm to Type ST1 of IS 5831. The colour of the outer sheath shall beblack.

3. Specifications for XLPE insulated HR PVC sheathed aluminum / copper conductorcable shall be as follows:

a. Conductor

Stranded compacted circular conductor shall be of electrical grade high conductivityaluminum / copper conductor per IS: 8130/84.

b. Insulation

The insulation shall be of natural unfilled chemically cross linked polyethylene conformingto IS: 7098. The thickness of insulation shall be as per the relevant Indian codes.

c. Laying-up

Insulated conductors of multi core cables shall be with plastic fiber in the interstices. Thephase identification of cores shall be by colored strips.

d. Inner Sheath

The cores shall be surrounded by either a wrapped or by an extruded PVC sheath. Thethickness of the inner sheath shall be as indicated in the relevant codes.

e. Armouring

The armouring shall be provided over the inner sheath. Single core cable shall have non-magnetic armouring. Multi core cables shall have either galvanized round steel wires orflat steel strip. Steel wires and strips for armouring confirm to IS: 3975. The direction oflay of armouring shall be opposite to that of cores.

f. Outer Sheath

Single and multi core cables are provided with an extruded PVC outer-sheath. Thethickness of the sheath shall be as per IS: 1554-1988. The PVC compound for the outer-sheath shall confirm to Type ST2 of IS: 5831. The colour of the outer sheath shall beblack.


65

4. CABLE LAYING AND HANDLING

It should be ensured that both ends of the cable are properly sealed to prevent ingress /absorption of moisture.

5. CABLE HANDLING

When cable drums have to be moved over short distance, they should be rolled in thedirection of the arrow marked on the drum.

While removing cables, the drums shall be properly mounted on jacks or on a cablewheels or any other suitable means, making sure the spindle, jack etc. are strong enoughto take the weight of the drum.

The cables shall not be given a sharp bend to a small radius. The minimum safe bendingradius for all types of PVC/XLPE cables shall be taken as 12 times the overall diameter ofthe cable. Wherever practicable, larger radius should be adopted. At joints andterminations, the bending radius of individual cores of a multicore cable shall not be lessthan 15 times its overall diameter.

Cable with kinks and straightened kinks, or with similar apparent defects like defectivearmoring etc. shall not be installed / laid.

Cables of different voltages as well as power and control cables should be kept indifferent trenches/racks with adequate separation. Where available space is restricted,LV/MV cable shall be laid above HV cables.

Where cables cross over cannot be avoided, the cable of higher voltage shall be laid at alower level than the cable of lower voltage.

Installation of cables including jointing shall be carried out as per IS: 1255 amended andrevised to date.

Power and communication cables shall, as far as possible cross at right angles. Wherepower cables are laid in proximity to communication cables, the horizontal and verticalclearances shall not normally be less than 60 cm.

Cables shall be laid direct in ground, in pipes / closed ducts, in open ducts or on surfacedepending on environmental conditions, and as required in schedule of quantities.

During the preliminary stages of laying the cable, consideration should be given to properlocation of the joint position so that when the cable is actually laid, the joints are made inthe most suitable places and as approved by Consultant. As far as possible, water loggedlocations, carriage ways, pavements, proximity to telephone cables, gas or water mains,inaccessible places, ducts, pipes, racks, etc. shall be avoided.

The cable shall not in any circumstances be bent so as to form an abrupt right angle butmust be rounded off at the corners to a radius not less than 12 times the overall diameterof the cable.

In case, where there are chances of any damage to the wiring/cables, such wiring/cablesshall be covered with a sheet metal protective covering (not less than 16 SWG), the baseof the covering being flush with the plaster or brickwork as the case may be, or the wiring/cables shall be drawn through a heavy gauge metal conduit pipe by complying with allthe requirements of conduit wiring system.

Such protective covering shall, in all cases, be fitted on all down drops within 1.5 m fromthe floor or from floor level upto the switch board, whichever is less.

While cutting and stripping of the outer sheathing of the cable, care shall be taken thatthe sharp edge of the cutting instrument does not touch the inner insulation of theconductors. The protective outer covering of the cable shall be stripped off near


66

connecting terminal and this protective covering shall be maintained upto close proximityof connecting terminals. The cables laid near junction boxes shall be made moistureproof with a plastic compound.

6. CABLE JOINTING & TERMINATION

Jointing shall be as per the manufacturer’s recommendations using standard kits. Cablejoints shall be made in suitable, approved cable joint boxes, jointing of cables in the jointboxes and filling of compound shall be done as per manufacturer’s recommendations.Heat shrinkable joints shall be made.

Cables shall be terminated onto the terminals of switchgear through crimping lugs ofproper size and of heavy duty. Cable lugs shall be fitted onto the cable by crimping orcompression jointing.

Continuity of cable armouring is to be maintained. Double compression glands to beused. Proper crimping tools to be used.

7. TRENCHING & CABLE LAYING

The minimum width of trench shall be 45 cm and depth shall be 75cm for laying of cable.Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench in horizontal formation, thewidth of trench shall be increased such that the minimum gap between the cables is onediameter of the cable unless specified otherwise.

The clearance between axis of the end cables and the sides of the trench shall beminimum 1.5 D (diameter) of the end cable.

The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight lines. Wherever there is a changein direction, suitable curvature shall be provided.

Where gradients and changes in depth are unavoidable, these shall be gradual.

The bottom of the trenches shall be level and free from stone, brick bats etc. The trenchshall then be provided with a layer of clean, dry sand cushion of not less than 9 cm indepth.

Cable laid in trenches in a single tier formation shall have a covering of clean, dry sand ofnot less than 20 cms. above the base cushion of sand before the protective cover is laid.

In the case of vertical multi-tier formation, after the first cable has been laid, a sandcushion of 30 cms shall be provided over the initial bed before second tier is laid. Ifadditional tiers are formed, each of the subsequent tiers shall have a sand cushion of 30cms as stated above. The top-most cable shall have final sand covering not less than 17cms before the protective cover is laid.

Unless otherwise specified, the cables shall be protected by second class bricks of notless than 20 cm x 10 cm x 10 cm (nominal size) as per CPWD building specification, orprotection covers placed on top of the sand, (brick to be laid breadth wise) for the fulllength of the cable to satisfaction of the owner. Where more than one cable is to be laidin the same trench, this protective covering shall cover all the cables and project at least5 cm over the sides of and cables.

The trenches shall be then back filled with excavated earth free from stone or othersharp-edged debris and shall be rammed and watered, if necessary, in successive layersnot exceeding 30 cm. Unless otherwise specified, a crown of earth not less than 50 mmin the center and tapering towards the sides of the trench shall be left to allow forsubsidence. The crown of earth, however, should not exceed 10 cms.

Where road bends or lawns have been cut or kerb stones displaced, the same shall berepaired to the satisfaction of the architect and all surplus earth or rock removed toplaces as specified.


67

In locations such as road crossing, entry to building in paved areas etc. cables shall belaid in pipes or closed ducts.

All cable entry/exit points into the building through pipe sleeves shall be properly sealedwith water and fire safe sealants in an approved manner to avoid any seepage of waterinto the building.

Manholes of adequate size, as decided by the Architect, shall be provided to facilitate ofadequate strength feeding/drawing in of cables and to provide working space for persons.Suitable manhole covers with frame of proper design shall cover Manholes.

CABLE LOOPS: Sufficient cable loop length shall be left.

8. CABLES ON HANGERS OR RACKS / TRAYS

The contractor shall provide and install all iron hangers racks, or racks with die-cast cleat,with fixing rag bolts or girder clamps or other specialist fixing as required.

Where hangers or racks are to be fixed to wall sides ceiling and other concretestructures, the contractor shall be responsible for cutting away, fixing and grouting in ragbolts and making good the damages as required.

The hangers or racks shall be designed to leave at least 25 mm clearance between thecables and the face to which it fixed. Multiple hangers shall have two or more fixing holes.All cables shall be saddled at not more than 500 mm intervals. These shall be designedto keep provision of some spare capacity for future development. Minimum spacingbetween the cables shall be one diameter of the cable or as specified.

9. CABLE TRAY

a) The MS cable trays should have undergone rigorous rust proofing process, which shouldcomprise of alkaline, degreasing, descaling in diluted sulpharic acid and a recognizedphosphating process. The sheet work shall then be given two coats of oxide primerbefore two coats of final painting. Cable trays shall be either painted (Stove enameled) orhot dip galvanized as called for in the schedule of quantities.

b) Cable trays shall be complete with bends, joints, coupler plates and accessories as maybe required for joining the cable trays.

c) Cable trays shall be either perforated or ladder type as called for in the schedule ofquantities.

10. PERFORATED CABLE TRAYS

Standard Technical details of perforated cable tray shall be as follows:

S.No.

Description Thickness

1. 150mm to 450mm width 2mm thick & 40mm collar2. 600mm to 750mm width 2mm thick & 50mm collar3. 900mm to 1200mm width 3mm thick & 75mm collar

Minimum 10mm dia GI rod suspender shall be used @ 1500mm intervals.

11. LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAYS

Standard technical details of ladder type cable trays shall be as follows:


68

S.No.

SIZE OF TRAY(Width)

SIZE OF MAINCHANNEL

SIZE OF RUNG &SPACING

BETWEEN RUNGS

SIZE OF ANGLEFOR SUPPORT

1. 900mm to 1500mm 25 x100 x 25 x 3mm 20 x 50 x 20 x 3mm@ 250C/C

50x50x5mm@150mm C/C

2. 600mm to 750mm 25 x 75 x 25 x 2.5mm 20 x 40 x 20 x 2.5mm@ 250C/C

40X40x5mm@180mm C/C

3. 150mm to 450mm 5 x 75 x 25 x 2mm 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5mm@ 250C/C

32X32x4mm@180mm C/C

Fixing arrangement shall be as approved by the Consultant / Owner / PMC

Hardware to be used in cable tray system shall be galvanized or zinc passivated.

a. Quality of Zinc

Zinc to be used shall conform to minimum Zn 98 grade as per requirement of IS: 209-1992.

b. Coating Requirement

Minimum weight of zinc coating for mild steel flats with thickness upto 6 mm inaccordance with IS:6745-1972 shall be 400 g/sqm.

The weight of coating expressed in grams per square meter shall be calculated bydividing the total weight of Zinc by total area (both sides) of the coated surface.

The Zinc coating shall be uniform, smooth and free from imperfections as flux, ash anddross inclusions, bare patches black spots, pimples, lumpiness, runs; rust stains bulkywhite deposits, blisters.

Mild steel flats / wires shall undergo a process of degreasing, pickling in acid, cold rinsingand then galvanizing.

12. TESTING OF CABLES

The Meggar value in normal dry weather shall be 50 mega ohm for 1.1 kV grade cable.Cables shall be tested at works for the following tests before being dispatched to site bythe project team:

a. Insulation Resistance Test.b. Continuity resistance test.c. Sheathing continuity test.d. Earth test.(in armoured cables)e. Hi Pot Test.

Test shall also be conducted at site for insulation between phases and between phaseand earth for each length of cable, before and after jointing. On completion of cablelaying work, the following tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner’s siterepresentative:

a. Insulation Resistance Test( Sectional and overall)b. Continuity resistance test.c. Sheathing continuity test.d. Earth test.

All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Standard Code of Practice andElectricity Rules. The Contractor shall provide necessary instruments, equipment andlabour for conducting the above tests and shall bear all expenses in connection with suchtests. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the PMC / Owner representative.

13. CABLE TAGS


69

Cable tags shall be made out of 2mm thick aluminum sheets. Each tag shall be 2” in diaor 3” x 3” square with one hole of 2.5mm dia, 6 mm below the periphery, or as approvedby Consultant. Cable designations are to be punched with letters / number punches andthe tags are to be tied to cables with piano wires of approve quality & size. Tags shall betied inside the panels beyond the glanding as well as above the glands at cable entries.Along trays tags are to be tied at all bends. On straight lengths, tags shall be provided atevery 5 meters.

Cables shall be secured to cable trays with 3mm thick x 25mm wide aluminumstrips/suitable GI clamp, or as approved by Consultant, at 1000 mm intervals andscrewed by means of rust proof screws, washers and bolts, of adequate but notexcessive lengths. Cable trays for horizontal runs suspended from the ceiling will besupported with mild steel straps or brackets, at 1000 mm intervals and the overall trayarrangement shall be of a rigid construction. External cabling route marker with GI platemarked with “DANGER 1.1 kV CABLE” with 1 meter long GI angle iron grouting bracketincluding 1:3:6 ratio cement concrete base block of minimum size 200 x 200 x 350 mm tobe provided or as approved by Elect. Supply Company.


70

B. EARTHING

1. SYSTEM OF EARTHING

The system shall be TNS with 4 wires supply system (R, Y, B, N and 2 Nos. E) broughtfrom the main LT Panel.

All non-current carrying metal parts of the electrical installation shall be earthed as per IS:3043 – 1987 with latest amendment. All metal conduits, cable sheath, switchgear, DBs,light fixture, equipment and all other parts made of metal shall be bonded together andconnected to earth electrodes. Earthing shall be in conformity with provisions of rules 32,61, 62, 67 and 68 of Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.

All earthing conductors shall be of high conductivity copper or GI, as specified in theschedule of quantities & shall have protection against mechanical damage. The cross-sectional area of earth conductors shall not be smaller than half that of the largest currentcarrying conductor.

Main earthing conductors shall be taken from the earth connections at the main L T panelto an earth electrode with which the connection is to be made. All joints in tapes shall bewith four rivets and shall be brazed in case of copper and by welding bolting in case ofGI. Wires shall be connected with crimping lugs, all bolts shall have spring washers. Sub-mains earthing conductors shall run from the main distribution panel to the subdistribution panel. Final distribution panel earthing conductors shall run from sub-distribution panel.

Circuit earthing conductor shall run from the exposed metal of equipment and shall beconnected to any point on the main earthing conductor, or its distribution panel. Metalconduits, cable sheathing and armouring shall be earthed at the ends adjacent todistribution panel at which they originate, or otherwise at the commencement of the runby an earthing conductor in effective electrical contact with cable sheathing. Whereequipment is connected by flexible cord, all exposed metal parts of the equipment shallbe earthed by means of an earthing conductor enclosed with the current carryingconductors within the flexible cord. Switches, accessories, lighting fitting etc. which arerigidly secured in effective electrical contact with a run of metallic conduit shall not beconsidered as a part of the earthing conductor for earthing purposes, even though the runof metallic conduit is earthed.

a. All Lighting fixtures, sockets outlets, fans, switch boxes and junction boxes etc.shall be earthed with copper wire as specified in schedule of quantities. Theearth wire ends shall be connected with solderless/bottle type copper lugs.

All the earth wires in switch boxes, sockets outlets, DB’s and light fixtures shallbe of green Colour (PVC insulated).

Main earth bus shall be taken from the L.T. switch board to earth electrodes. Theelectrical resistance of earthing conductors shall be low enough to permitpassage of fault current necessary to operate fuse or circuit breaker, and it shallnot exceed 1 ohm.

2. SIZING OF EARTHING CONDUCTORS

The cross sectional area of earthing conductor shall not be smaller than half of thelargest current carrying conductor subject to an upper limit of 80 Sq.mm. If the area of thelargest current carrying conductor or bus bar exceeds 160 sq.mm then two or moreearthing conductors shall be used in parallel, to provide at least half the cross sectionalarea of the current carrying conductor or bus bars. All fixtures, outlet boxes, junctionboxes and power circuits upto 15 amps shall be earthed with PVC insulated copper wire.

All 3 phase switches and distribution panels upto 60 amps rating shall be earthed with 2Nos. distinct and independent 4 mm dia copper / GI wires. All 3 phase switches anddistribution panels upto 100 amps rating shall be earthed with 2 Nos. distinct and


71

independent 6 mm dia copper / GI wires. All switches, bus bar, ducts and distributionpanels of rating 200 amps and above shall be earthed with minimum of 2 nos separateand independent 25 mm x 3 mm copper / GI tape.Earthing details given in Table – A & B shall be referred to as a general guidance. Exactsizes to be worked out by the contractor as per relevant IS Codes.

Table - A

Size of earth leads

(a) For Transformer/Generator Neutral Point Earthing:

Electrolytic GalvanizedTransformer/ Bare copper IronDG Set Conductor Wire Conductor wireRating or strip or strip50kVA & below/4mm dia 4mm dia 25mm x 6.0mm75 kVA 25mm x 3.0mm 25mm x 6.0mm100 kVA 25mm x 6.0mm 32mm x 6.0mm150 kVA 25mm x 6.0mm 40mm x 6.0mm200 kVA 25mm x 6.0mm 40mm x 6.0mm250 kVA 25mm x 6.0mm 40mm x 6.0mm300 kVA 25mm x 6.0mm 40mm x 6.0mm500 kVA 40mm x 6.0mm 40mm x 6.0mm750 kVA 40mm x 6.0mm 50mm x 6.0mm1000 kVA 40mm x 6.0mm 50mm x 6.0mm1250 kVA 50mm x 6.0mm 50mm x 6.0mm1500 kVA 50mm x 6.0mm 75mm x 6.0mm2000 kVA 50mm x 6.0mm 75mm x 6.0mm

NOTE: - EXACT SIZE OF EARTH LEAD TO BE DETERMINED AS PER LATEST ISCODES.

TABLE – B

(b) For Equipment Earthing (Applicable to Transformer, Generators, Switchgears,Panels, DB’s, Motors etc.)

Rating of Bare Electrolytic Galvanised400-V, 3ph Copper conductor Iron Wire / Strip50 cy. Equipment Wire / StripIn kVA

upto 5 2mm dia 2mm dia6 to 15 3mm dia 3mm dia16 to 30 4mm dia 4mm dia31 to 50 6mm dia 6mm dia51 to 100 25mm x 3.0mm 25mm x 6.0mm101 to 125 25mm x 3.0mm 32mm x 6.0mm126 to 150 25mm x 3.0mm 32mm x 6.0mm151 to 200 25mm x 6.0mm 40mm x 6.0mm201 to 300 25mm x 6.0mm 50mm x 6.0mm301 to 500 32mm x 6.0mm 50mm x 6.0mm501 to 800 40mm x 6.0mm 50mm x 6.0mmAbove 800 50mm x 6.0mm 50mm x 6.0mm

NOTE: EXACT SIZE OF EARTH LEAD TO BE DETERMINED AS PER LATEST ISCODES.

NOTE: ALL THREE PHASE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE DOUBLE EARTHED


72

3. PROHIBITED CONNECTIONS

Neutral conductor, sprinkler pipes, or pipes conveying gas, water, or inflammable liquid,structural steel work, metallic enclosures, metallic conduits and lighting protection systemconductors shall not be used as a earthing conductor.

4. CONNECTION/JOINTS

The earthing connections/joints should be bolted, riveted, welded, brazed type.

In case of bolted joints, GI/Passivated hardware’s of adequate size/nos. should be usedfor firm connections. The minimum contact area should be equal to the width of the stripor cross-sectional area of earthing lead. Welded/brazed joints should be smooth andcontinues. All welded/brazed joints should be treated with anti-corrosive paints to protectit from corrosion/rusting.

All bolted connections/joints of Cu strip should be tinned.

Wherever, flexible earthing connection is must, it should be hydraulically crimped lugs ofCopper/Aluminum.The effective earthing connection surface should be smooth & free from paints and oxidecoatings.

5. EARTHING

The following must always be ensured in earthing system:

All earths must be interconnected. This includes transformer neutrals, Transformer body,HT Panels, LT Panels, lightning protection system earths, UPS earths etc and provisionfor interconnection with other services earthing grid etc. shall be made. All earth pitsshould be at equi - potential.

Extraneous conductive parts such as gas pipes, other service pipes and ducting risersand pipes of fire protection equipment and exposed metallic parts of the buildingstructure.

The Contractor shall get the soil resistivity test done at his own cost of the area whereearthing pits are to be located before starting the installation.

6. RESISTANCE TO EARTH

The resistance of earthing system shall not exceed 1 ohm.

SPECIFICATION FOR HOT DIP GALVANIZING PROCESS FOR MILD STEEL USEDFOR EARTHING FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

7. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

a. Quality of Zinc

Zinc to be used shall conform to minimum Zn 98 grade as per requirement of IS: 209-1992.

b. Coating Requirement

Minimum weight of zinc coating for mild steel flats with thickness upto 6 mm inaccordance with IS:6745-1972 shall be 400 g/sqm.


73

The weight of coating expressed in grams per square meter shall be calculated bydividing the total weight of Zinc by total area (both sides) of the coated surface.

The Zinc coating shall be uniform, smooth and free from imperfections as flux, ash anddross inclusions, bare patches black spots, pimples, lumpiness, runs; rust stains bulkywhite deposits, blisters.Mild steel flats / wires shall undergo a process of degreasing pickling in acid, cold rinsingand then galvanizing. Jointing of earthing tape shall be by welding. All joints and cut endsshall be properly painted with aluminum paint.

8. MAINTENANCE FREE CHEMICAL EARTHING:

Maintenance Free Chemical Earthing shall be done strictly as per manufacturer’srecommendations. It shall be completely maintenance free, long life close to 25 years,environmentally safe, non corrosive & electrically conductive. The earth resistance resultsshall be less than one ohm.

C. MV PANELS:1.0 GENERAL

Medium voltage power control centres (generally termed as switchboard panels) shall bein sheet steel clad cubicle pattern, free floor standing, totally enclosed,compartmentalized design having multitier arrangement of the incomers and feeders asper details given in the schedule of quantities. All panels shall conform to therequirements of the latest addition of IS and shall be suitable for 415 V, 3 phase ACsupply or 230 V single phase AC supply as required. The drawing of panel mmay gotapproved from Engineer En-charge before placing order.

2.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES

The Switch Boards shall be totally enclosed, sheet steel cubicle pattern, extensible oneither side, dead front, floor mounting type (wall mounting if specifically asked for inBOQ) and shall have a bus bar chamber at the top and the cable entry from the bottom.(For panel requiring top cable entries if any, refer to BOQ). The cable terminations shouldbe in side the feeder compartment only.

The Switch Boards shall be completely dust and vermin proof. Synthetic rubber gasketsbetween all adjacent units and beneath all covers shall be provided to render the jointsdust and vermin proof to provide a degree of ingress protection of IP 43. All doors andcovers shall also be fully gasketed with synthetic rubber. All the live parts shall beproperly shrouded with FRP sheets.

The Switch Board shall be fabricated with CRCA Sheet Steel of thickness not less than2.0mm and shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for allcomponents. The doors and covers shall be constructed from CRCA sheet steel ofthickness not less than 1.6 mm. Joints of any kind in sheet metal shall be seam weldedand all welding slag ground off and welding pits wiped smooth with plumber metal. Basechannel shall be fabricated from ISMC 75 and door shall be provided at the bottom witharrangement for fixing bolts in the foundation.

All panels and door covers shall be properly fitted and square with the frame. The cutoutsin the panel shall be correctly positioned.

Lifting lugs of adequate strength shall be provided on each transport section of thepanels.Fixing screws shall enter holes tapped into an adequate thickness of metal or providedwith hank nuts. Self threading screws shall not be used in the construction of the SwitchBoards.

3.0 SWITCHBOARD DIMENSIONAL LIMITATIONS

A base channel 75 mm x 5 mm thick shall be provided at the bottom.

The overall height of the Switch Board shall be limited to 2200 mm


74

The height of the operating handle, push buttons etc shall be restricted between 300 mmand 1900 mm from finished floor level.

4.0 BUS BARS

The bus bars shall be suitable for 4 wire, 415 volts, 50 Hz, system. The main bus barshall be made of high conductivity electrolytic grade AL 91E Aluminium. The bus barsshall have uniform cross section throughout the panel. The bus bars shall be capable ofcarrying the rated current at 415 volts continuously. The bus bar will run in a separatebusbar chamber using bus insulators made of non-deteriorating, vermin proof, nonhygroscopic materials such as epoxy fiber, reinforced polyester or moulding compound(min. 25mm clearance between phase to phase & phase to neutral busbars shall beprovided). The interval between the two insulators will be designed after considering thefollowing:a) Strength and safe load rating of the insulator,b) The vibrating force generated during a fault,c) A Factor of safety of 1.25d) A set of insulators at both ends of the bus.

Bus bars shall be sized considering maximum current density of 1 Amps/ cross sectionSq.mm area. The size of the bus bar calculations must be approved by the consultants.The bus bars shall be designed to withstand a temperature rise of 45oC above theambient. To limit the temperature rise in the bus bar chamber a set of louvers can beprovided at strategical places considering the air circulation.All the bus bars shall be insulated with PVC heat shrinking sleeves throughout (except atjoints) the length of the panel. The electro-galvanised high tensile steel nuts, bolts, plainor spring washers of suitable size will be used in connecting the various section of thebus bars.

5.0 SWITCH BOARD INTERCONNECTIONS

All connections between the bus bars/Breakers terminations shall be through solidAluminium strips of adequate size to carry full rated current which shall be PVC/fibreglass insulated.For switch unit ratings upto 63A PVC insulated copper conductor wires of adequate sizeto carry full load current can be used. The terminations of all such interconnections shallbe properly crimped.

6.0 CABLE TERMINATIONS

Knockout holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the Switch Board inconformity with the location of incoming and outgoing conduits/cables. All cable entriesshall be from bottom until & unless specifically asked for in the BOQ.

The cable terminations of the circuit breakers shall be brought out to terminal cablesockets suitably located in the panel.

All outgoing links for FSU\MCB feeders shall be in the feeder compartment only.The Switch Boards shall be complete with tinned brass cable sockets, tinned brasscompression glands, gland plates, supporting clamps and brackets etc for termination of1100 volt grade aluminium conductor PVC cables.

7.0 EARTHING

The panels shall be provided with an aluminium earth bus of suitable size runningthrough out the length of the switchboard. Suitable earthling eyes/bolts (at min. twopoints) shall be provided on the main earthing bus to connect the same to the earth grid


75

at the site. Sufficient number of star washers shall be provided at the joints to achieveearth continuity between the panels and the sheet metal parts.

8.0 INTERLOCKING

The panels shall be provided with the following interlocking arrangement.

a) The door of the switch-fuse compartments is so interlocked with the switch drive orhandle that the door can be opened only if the switch is in ÒFF' position. De-interlocking arrangement shall also be provided for occasional inspection.

b) It shall not be possible for the breaker to be withdrawn when in ÒN' position.

c) It shall not be possible for the breakers to be switched on unless it is either in fullyinserted positions or for testing purposes in fully isolated position.

d) The breaker shall be capable of being raked in to `testing' ìsolated' and`maintenance' positions and kept locked in any of these position.

e) A safety latch to ensure that the movement of the breaker as it is withdrawn, ischecked before it is completely out of the cubicle shall be provided.

9.0 WIRINGAll wiring for relays and meters shall be with PVC insulated copper conductor wires. Thewiring shall be coded and labeled with approved ferrules for identification. The minimumsize of copper conductor control wires shall be 1.5 sq.mm except for the circuits relatedto current transformers or circuits with current carrying capacity more than 5 Amps (forwhich min. 2.5 Sq.mm copper conductor wires shall be used).

10.0 SHEET STEEL TREATMENT AND PAINTING

Sheet Steel materials used in the construction of these units should have undergone arigorous rust proofing process comprising of alkaline degreasing, descaling in dilutesulfuric acid and a recognised phosphating process. The steel work shall then receivetwo coats of oxide primer before final painting. Castings shall be scrupulously cleanedand fettled before receiving a similar oxide primer coat.All sheet steel shall after metal treatment shall be powder coated with shade RAL 7032(Siemens Gray) on the outside of the panel and mounting plates shall be of orange shade. Each coat of paint shall be properly stoved and the paint thickness shall not be less than50 microns (shade of paint may be changed if the Engineer In charge so desires).

11.0 NAME PLATES AND LABELS

Suitable engraved white on black name plates and identification labels of metal for allSwitch Boards and Circuits shall be provided. These shall indicate the feeder number andfeeder designation.

12.0 INSTALLATION

Installation shall be done by erection Contractor.

13.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Copies of type tests and routine test as per relevant specification, carried out atmanufacturer’s work shall be submitted to the ENGINEER IN CHARGE as required.

Wiring and connections including earthing shall be checked for continuity and tightness.


76

Insulation shall be measured with a 500 V megger and insulation resistance shall not beless than 100 Mega ohms

Interlocking operation to be checked as per requirement.

Tests shall be performed in presence of authorized representative of the ENGINEER INCHARGE for which the contractor shall give due prior notice.

14.0 HIGH VOLTAGE TEST

A high voltage test with 2.5 KV for one minute shall be applied between the poles andearth. Test shall be carried out on each pole in turn with the remaining poles earthed, allunits raked in position and the breakers closed. Original test certificate shall be submittedalong with panel.

15.0 PRE-COMMISSION TESTS:

Panels shall be commissioned only after the successful completion of the following tests.The tests shall be carried in the presence of Architect's/Consultant's or theirrepresentatives.

i) All main and auxiliary bus bar connections shall be checked and tightened.

ii) All wiring termination and bus bar joints shall be checked and tightened.

iii) Wiring shall be checked to ensure that it is according to the drawing.

iv) All wiring shall be tested for insulation resistance by a 1000 volts meggar.

v) Phase rotation tests shall be conducted

vi) All relays and protective devices shall be tested for correctness of settings andoperation by introducing a current generator and an ammeter in the circuit.

16.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

The panels & switch gear components shall be suitable for following climatic conditions:

Maximum Minimum

DBT 45OC 3OCRH 90% 20%

17.0 HEATING ARRANGEMENT:

The panel shall be provided with a thermostatically controlled heating arrangementfor monsoon (200 Watt) to take care of high humidity conditions. A 6/16A servicesocket outlet (single phase) shall be provided in one of the compartments in all thepanels.

18.0 METERING, INSTRUMENTATION AND PROTECTION

1.0 The specifications hereinafter laid down shall cover all the meters, instrumentationand protective devises required for the electrical work. The ratings, type and quantityof meters, instruments and protective devices shall be as per the schedule ofquantities and drawings.


77

Measuring Instruments

General

Direct reading electrical instruments shall be in conformity with IEC-51, BS: 89 or IS:1248. The accuracy of direct reading shall be 1.0 for voltmeters and 1.5 for ammeters.Other type of instruments shall have accuracy of 1.5. The error due to variations intemperature shall be limited to a minimum. The meter shall be enclosed in a dust tighthousing. The housing shall be of steel or phenolic mould. The design and manufacture ofthe meters shall ensure the prevention of fogging of instrument glass. Instrument metersshall be sealed in such a way that access to the measuring element and to theaccessories within the case shall not be possible without removal of the seal. The metersshall be provided with white dials and black scale marking. The pointer shall be black incolour and shall have zero position adjustment device which could be operated fromoutside. The direction of deflection shall be from left to right. Suitable selector switchesshall be provided for all ammeters and voltmeters intended to be used on three phasesupply.

a) AmmetersAmmeters shall be moving iron type. The moving part assembly shall be with jewelbearings. The jewel bearing shall be mounted on a spring to prevent damage to pivot dueto vibrations and shocks. The ammeters shall be manufactured and calibrated as per thelatest edition of IS 1248 or BS 89. Ammeters shall be instrument transformer operated,and shall be suitable for 5 A. Secondary of instrument transformer. The scales shall becalibrated to indicate primary current, unless otherwise specified. The ammeters shall becapable of carrying sustained overloads during fault conditions without damage or loss ofaccuracy.

b) Voltmeters

Voltmeter shall be of moving iron type. The range for 400 volts, 3 phase voltmeters shallbe to 0 to 500 volts. Suitable selector switch shall be provided for each voltmeter to readvoltage between any two lines of the system. The voltmeter shall be provided withprotection fuse of suitable capacity.

2.0 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

Current Transformers

Current transformers shall be in conformity with IS:2705 (Part-I, II, & III) in all respects. Allcurrent transformers to be used in the L.T. Electrical panels shall be low tension, ringtype resin cast current transformer with the requisite currents ratio having secondary ofthe current transformers selected will be based on the following;

1. For energy measuring : 1.0 class of accuracy.2. For other metering : 1.5 class of accuracy.3. For protects on : 3.0 class of accuracy. Where a common CT is used for different

functions the CT accuracy class will be equal to the best class required by any ofthose function.

Current transformers shall be capable of withstanding without damage, magnetic andthermal stresses due to short circuit fault of 35 MVA on medium voltage system.Terminals of the current transformers shall be marked permanently for easy identificationof poles. Current transformers shall be provided with earthing terminals for earthingchassis frame work and fixed part of the metal casing (if any). Each CT shall be providedwith rating plate indicating the following:

1. Name and make2. Serial Number3. Transformation ratio4. Rated burden5. Rated voltage


78

6. Accuracy class

The current transformers to be selected for this panel will have at least 20% extra VAcapacity available over the normal capacity based on the following details ;

1. For ammeters : 3 VA2. For current coils of KW & KWHR, PF, KVAR meters or for all recorders : 5 VA.3. For normal wiring : 2 VA.4. For current coil of protection relays: 10 VA under; no circumstances the VA rating of

the CT's will be less than 15 VA.

Current transformers shall be mounted such that they are easily accessible forinspection, maintenance and replacement. The wiring for CTs shall be copper conductor,PVC insulated wires with proper termination lugs and wiring shall be bunched with cablestraps and fixed to the panel structure in a neat manner.

3.0 CONTROL DEVICES

a) Push Buttons

The push buttons used in the panels will be rated for more than 415 volts and 2 amps. Allthe push buttons will be mounted on the front door and the assembly will be in two parts.All the push buttons will be mounted on the front door of the cubicle in regularsymmetrical fashion as per the general norms being practiced. Only one make of pushbuttons will be used in the assembly of all the panels. The selection of the colour of thepush buttons will be as follows

Function ColourStarting/Switching ON GreenStopping/Switching OFF RedResetting BlackForward ON YellowReverse ON BlueEmergency OFF Red/Mushroom

b) Indicating Lights

The indicating lights used in the panel will be pleasant looking and round shape havingthe following features;

1. A separate front lens for it's easy replacement.2. Facility to replace the bulb from the front.3. Baynet pin cap bulbs of standard size to be used.4. The shape of the lens to allow viewing from sides.5. Series resistance with use of low voltage bulb for longer life.6. Clear and distinct indication for light ON and OFF with differences of brightness of the

lens.

The selection of the colours of the indicating lamps will be as follows:- Red for system in operation- Amber for system ready for operation.- Green for system being put off.- Red, yellow and blue for incoming supply.

5.0 TESTING

5.1 Instrument transformers shall be tested at factory as per IS:2705 & IS:3156. The testshall incorporate the following:

a) Type testsb) Routine tests


79

Original test certificates in triplicate shall be provided.

5.2 Meters shall be tested as per IS: 1248. The tests shall include both type tests and routinetests. Original test certificate in triplicate shall be furnished.

5.3 a) Suitable injection tests shall be applied to the secondary circuit of every instrument toestablish the correctness of calibration and working order.

b) All relays and protective devices shall be tested to establish correctness of settingand operation by introducing a current generator and an ammeter in the circuit.

19.0 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

The MCB's shall be of the completely moulded design suitable for operation at 240/415Volts 50 Hz system. MCB’s shall be quick make and break type conforming to relevantIS. Housing shall be heat resistant and have a high impact strength. MCB’s shall be flushmounting type and shall be provided with trip free manual operating liver with ON/OFFindications

MCB’s shall be provided with magnetic thermal releases for overcurrent and short circuitprotection. The overload or short circuit device shall have a common trip bar in case ofDP and TPN MCB’s. The MCB's shall have inverse time delayed thermal overload andinstantaneous magnetic short circuit protection. The MCB time current characteristic shallcoordinate with H.R.C. fuse/PVC cable characteristic.

The MCB's shall have a minimum breaking capacity of 10 kA at 230/415 volts inaccordance with IEC : 898 - 1995 and IS : 8828 – 1996

20.0 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1.0 GENERAL

Moulded case circuit breakers shall be incorporated in the switch board whereverspecified. MCCB shall conform to IEC:947-II or IS:13947-II in all respects. MCCB shallbe suitable for three phase 415 volts AC. Suitable discrimination shall be providedbetween upstream and down stream breakers in the range of 10-20 milli seconds. AllMCCBs will have earth fault module (if specifically asked) and front operated. All fourpole MCCB shall be suitable for three phase four wire system, with the neutral clearlyidentified and capable of first make last break feature.

2.0 CONSTRUCTION

The MCCB cover and case shall be made of high strength heat-resistant and flameretardant thermosetting insulating material, operating handle shall be quick make/quickbreak. The operating handle shall have suitable `ON' `OFF' and `TRIPPED' mechanicalindicators notable from outside. All MCCBs shall have a common operating handle forsimultaneous operation and tripping of all the three phases. The MCCB should besuitable for disconnection and isolation with marking on front name plate.

Suitable arc extinguishing device shall be provided for each contact. Tripping unit shallbe thermal-magnetic type provided on each pole and connected by a common trip barsuch that tripping of any one pole operates all three poles to open simultaneously.Thermal magnetic tripping device shall have IDMT characteristics for sustained over loadand short circuits. All MCCBs above 250 Amps will also have short circuit magneticpickup level adjustment.

MCCBs

All MCCBs shall have variable thermal overload releases which can be adjusted at site.


80

3.0 Contact tips shall be made of suitable arc resistant, sintered alloy for long electrical life.Terminals shall be of liberal design with adequate clearances. All MCCBs of higherratings above 250 Amps, shall be provided with separate extended arcing contacts.

4.0 INTERLOCKING

Moulded case circuit breakers shall be provided with the following interlocking devices forinterlocking the door of a switch board.

a) Handle interlock to prevent unnecessary manipulations of the breaker.

b) Door interlock to prevent the door being opened when the breaker is in ON or OFFposition.

c) Defeat-interlocking device to open the door even if the breaker is in ON position.

5.0 BREAKING CAPACITY

The moulded case circuit breaker shall have a rated service. Short circuit breakingcapacity of not less than 25 KA rms at 415 volts AC. Wherever required, higher breakingcapacity breakers to meet the system short circuit fault shall be used.

6.0 ACCESSORIES

All the accessories like shunt, undervoltage contact blocks shall be of snap fittingpossible at site.

7.0 TESTING

a) Original test certificate of the MCCB shall be furnished.

b) Pre-commissioning tests on the switch board panel incorporating the MCCB shall bedone as per standard specifications.

21.0 MEDIUM VOLTAGE AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER

1.0 GENERAL

Air circuit breakers shall be incorporated in the panels wherever specified. ACB shallconform to IEC 947-II or IS: 13947-II in all respects. ACBs shall be suitable for operationon 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz, AC supply. All air circuit breakers using in the panel will bemounted in separate cubicles and will be of the same make to maintain the uniformity.

2.0 TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION

Air circuit breakers shall be of enclosed pattern, dead front air break type with trip freeoperating mechanism. All ACBs will be thermal magnetic type. Air Circuit breakers shallbe of with drawable type and will be mounted on a rigid steel frame. The ACBs shall bestrong and robust in construction with suitable arrangement for anchoring when in fullyengaged or fully drawn out positions. There shall be no dependence upon the panelboard frame for any critical alignment. The withdrawal arrangement shall be such as toallow smooth and easy movement. The ACB shall have minimum four positions service,test , isolated and maintenance.

All the current carrying parts of the circuit breakers shall be silver plated. Suitable arcingcontacts shall be provided to protect the main contacts. The contacts shall be of springloaded design. The sequence of operation of the contacts shall be such that arcingcontacts `make before' and break after the main contacts. Arcing contacts shall beprovided with efficient are chutes on each pole. The contact tips and arc chutes shall besuitable for ready replacement. Self aligning isolating contacts with automatic shutters toscreen the live parts shall be provided. The design of the breaker shall be such that allthe components are easily accessible for inspection, maintenance and replacement.


81

Operating Mechanism

Air circuit breaker shall be provided with a quick-make, trip free operating mechanism.The operating mechanism shall be strain-free spring operated. The system will havehorizontal, self aligning, isolating pairs of moving and stationary power and controlcontracts. The unit will have three horizontal positions corresponding to:

a) Plugged in Position

Here both the power and control contacts are in made position and the breakers getsmechanically locked in this position. The breaker can go in ON position only afterbeing locked in this position.

b) Test Position

Here the power contacts gets isolated where as the control contacts can be kept inmade status. The breakers can be mechanically locked in this position and made ONand off for testing purposes.

c) With drawn Position

In this position the power and control connections are in isolated status and themoving portion of the breaker can be dismantled from the panel.

An isolating shutter or set of shutters are to be provided for the automatic coverage oflive power and control fixed isolating contacts in the withdrawn position.

All the breakers with remote closing arrangement will have a spring charging motor ofsingle phase 230 V and a closing coil. In case of power failure the spring chargingcan be done manually with the help of button or lever. The circuit breaker shouldswitch on only when the spring is charged fully which should be able to store energyfor one closing and one tripping operation. The spring will also get fully chargedwhen the breaker is in closed position. In this case the spring should store enoughenergy to make first tripping, one re-closing and the second tripping. The ACB shouldhave an anti pumping feature.

The breaker will have quick making trip free closing mechanism. The operation ofthe mechanism will be independent of the speed of the closing lever or the durationof the closing signal.

The breaker will have following indications distinctly not able from out side :-

- Mechanical indicator for spring fully charged.- Mechanical indicator for spring discharged.- Electrical indication of breaker ON status.- Electrical indication of breaker OFF status.- Electrical indication of trip circuit healthy.

- Separate trip indication for overload and short circuit.

All breakers will have switching ON and OFF time of less than 4 cycles and will havethe following interlocks for the safe operation of the equipment.Breakers to ON only when mechanically locked many of the three horizontal isolationposition.

When the breaker is in plugged in position it will ON only with the front door closed.The breakers will be provided with 6 Nos. each of type NO and NC auxiliary contactsrated for 10 Amps AC at 415 V and 6 Amps DC at 48 V. These contacts are inaddition to the ones already in use for the operation of the breaker and will berequired for subsequent interlocks incorporated in near future.


82

When ever requested mechanical positive inter locks will be provided between theoperation of different breakers with the help of individually unique and matched castlekey locks.

Rating

The rating of the circuit breaker shall be as per the drawings and schedule ofquantities. The rated breaking capacity of the breakers shall be minimum 50 KA oras specified at 415 volts AC. The rated making capacity shall be as per relevantstandard.

Accessories

Circuit breakers shall be provided with the following Accessories.a) Under-voltage relay for the incoming ACB.b) Overload release with IDMT characteristics.c) Instantaneous over current relays.d) Alarm switches (if specifically asked for)e) Auxiliary switchesf) Circuit breaker position indicators ON/OFF/TEST/ ISOLATED.

Testing

Testing of each circuit breaker shall be carried out at the works as per IS:13947-IIand the original test certificate shall be furnished in triplicate. The tests shallincorporate at least the following:a) Impulse withstand testb) Power frequency withstand testc) Short circuit testd) Temperature-rise test under rated conditions.

9.1 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

1 The contractor shall submit the original manufacturer’s test certificates in respect of,ACB, Pumping Sets, Motors, Starters, Main switches etc.

2 The aluminium copper conductor cable (heavy) should be ISI marked PVC insulated,armored and should be confirming to relevant IS-Specifications, codes with latestamendments.

3 Test Certificate:-A test certificate from the manufacturers shall be handed over to the department beforeinstallation of the equipment specifying that the equipment conforms to relevant I.S.S/P.W.D. specifications.

4 Wiring Diagram:-After completion of the work a complete drawing showing connections to the variousequipments is to be prepared by the tenderer and to be submitted to the departmentalongwith final bill of the work.

5 Connections:-Inter connections from the bus-bar chamber to the different main switches/Air circuitbreakers should be through solid copper bars of the required capacity duly insulated forwhich no extra payment will be made.


83

6 The rates quoted should be F.O.R. at site of work including cost of installation, freight,octroi taxes and other charges. Nothing extra over and above rates will be admissible.

7 Superflous conditions and conditional tender will be rejected.

8 Telegraphic tenders and tenders without earnest money in shape of deposit at call willnot be accepted.

9 The machinery will be installed as per standard P.W.D. specifications and to the entiresatisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

10 The quantity of electrical equipments and pumping sets can be increased/ decreased bythe department.

11 The tender submitted by the firms shall be valid for 90 days (3 months) from the date ofopening of Price Bid.

12 In case any mistake is found in the N.I.T. the same shall be rectifiable even after theopening of the tender and execution of contract agreement as per requirement and siteconditions.

13 Pump, Motor, Generator, Starters, ACB shall be inspected by Department officers at thefactory premises before being transported to the store or agency/work place.

9.2 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

9.2.1 The contractor shall maintain all Independent Feeders erected under this contract for aperiod of 12 months during the Defect Liability Period. Details of staff to be deputedduring the maintenance period shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge and priorapproval shall be taken.

FIRE FIGHTING

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION- I:: FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

1. SCOPE


84

The scope of this section consists of following but is not limited and required as per site conditions,to supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the fire protection system. The philosophy ofthe system is as follows :

a. The Fire Suppression System shall comprise the Fire Hydrants System, and HandAppliances.

i. Fire Hydrant System (Pressurised) for the internal landing valves and the hose reels atlandings.

b. The Hydrant System under normal conditions shall be pressurized by means of the electricmotor driven Jockey Pump.

c. The Hydrant shall be provided with two pump sets, one of which will be diesel engine drivenand the other electric motor driven.

d. The starting and stopping of the Jockey pump shall be automatic based on the pressureswitches at preset low and high pressure.

e. Terrace Pump

f. The electric motor driven Hydrant starts automatically at a preset pressure by means of apressure switch. As soon as the Hydrant Pump starts, the Jockey Pump Stops. If for anyreason or electric failure the electric motor driven Hydrant Pump does not start at the presetpressure or is unable to maintain the pressure, the diesel engine driven Hydrant Pump startsat the preset pressure.

g. The Hydrant Pump, whether electric motor driven or the diesel engine driven shall bestopped only manually.

h Tenderer shall ensure Hydro Testing of the complete system.

i The Tenderer shall obtain the necessary approval of the drawings and the schemes fromthe local authority / Fire Depptt. as per the requirement at his own cost. The tenderer shallalso take care of any other requirement so that insurance cover can be obtained, if requiredat minimum premium at later date. After completion of work completion certification for fireofficer /local authority.

j. The tenderer shall design and after approval of Services Consultant/ Engineer In Charge/Engineer-In-Charge display a glass covered framed floor plan clearly showing the locationsof all landing valves, hose reels, hand appliances, as well as the DO’s and DON’T’s neareach stair case landing for the personnel and the exit direction in case of an emergency.The dimensions of the floor plan, its scale, lettering size, colour scheme etc shall be asdirected by the Services Consultant/Engineer In Charge/Engineer-In-Charge.

k. Cost for getting Approval of Fire Hydrant and Sprinkler system from local fire authority andany other relevant statutory authority at initial and various other stages of work, includingpreparation of report/drawings as per fire authority shall be included. Contractor shallinclude cost of all liason work which are not explicity mentioned above but are mandatory tohave fire authority approval.

2. PIPE WORK

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

All materials shall be of the best quality conforming to the specifications and subject to the approvalof the Consultants.


85

Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance andshall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.

Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps and supports (galvanised afterfabrication) at intervals specified. Only approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used for RCCslabs and walls / floors etc.

Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located that they are easily accessible for operations,repairs and maintenance.

Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat workmanlike manner.

Pipe accessories such as gauges, meters, control devices, etc. shall have the same workingpressure rating as the associated pipework. All pipework shall be free from burrs, rust and scale andshall be cleaned before installation. All personnel engaged on welding operations must possess acertificate of competence issued by an acceptable / recognized authority.

2.2 PIPING

Pipes of following types are to be used:

Sprinkler and Hydrant system pipes shall be Mild Steel black pipes as per IS: 1239 heavy grade (forpipes of sizes 150 mm N.B. and below) and IS: 3589 heavy grade (for pipe sizes above 150 mmNB). M.S. pipes buried below ground shall be primered by anticorrosive pyp kote primer and suitablywrapped with bitumin base 4 mm pyp kote wrapping ang coating.

All pipe clamps and supports shall be fabricated from MS steel sections and shall be factorygalvanised before use at site. Welding of galvanised clamps and supports shall not be permitted.

Pipes shall be hung by means of expandable anchor fastener of approved make and design. Thehangers and clamps shall be fastened by means of galvanised nuts and bolts. The size/diameter ofthe anchor fastener and the clamps shall be suitable to carry the weight of water filled pipe and deadload normally encountered.

Hangers and supports shall be throughly galvanised after fabrication. The selection and design ofthe hanger & support shall be capable of carrying the sum of all concurrently acting loads. They shallbe designed to provide the required supporting effects and allow pipeline movements as necessary.All guides, anchor braces, dampener, expansion joint and structural steel to be attached to thebuilding/structure trenches etc. shall be provided. Hangers and components for all piping shall beapproved by the Consultants.

The piping system shall be tested for leakages at 2 times the operating pressure or 1.5 time shut-offpressure, which ever is highest including testing for water hammer effects.

Flanged joints shall be used for connections for vessels, equipment, flanged valves and also on twostraight lengths of pipelines of strategic points to facilitate erection and subsequent maintenancework.

For pipes under ground installation the pipes shall be buried at least one meter below ground leveland shall have 230 mm x 230 mm masonry or concrete supports at least 300 mm high at 3mintervals. Masonry work to have plain cement concrete foundation (1 cement: 4 coarse sand: 8 stoneaggregate) of size 380x380x75 thick resting on firm soil.

Mains below ground level shall be supported at regular intervals not exceeding 3.0 metres and shallbe laid at least 2.0 metre away from the building.

2.3 PIPING INSTALLATION & SUPPORT


86

Tender drawings indicate schematically the size and location of pipes. The Contractor, on the awardof the work, shall prepare detailed working drawings, showing the cross-sections, longitudinalsections, details of fittings, locations of isolating and control valves, drain and air valves, and all pipesupports. He must keep in view the specific openings in buildings and other structure through whichpipes are designed to pass.

Piping shall be properly supported on, or suspended from, on stands, clamps, hangers as specifiedand as required. The Contractor shall adequately design all the brackets, saddles, anchor, clampsand hangers, and be responsible for their structural stability.

Pipe work and fittings shall be supported by hangers or brackets so as to permit free expansion andcontraction. Risers shall be supported at each floor with Galvanised steel clamps. To permit freemovement of common piping support shall be from a common hanger bar fabricated fromGalvanised steel sections.

Pipe hangers shall be provided at the following maximum spacings:

Pipe Dia(mm)

Hanger Rod Dia(mm)

Spacing between Supports(m)

Up to 25 6 2

32 to 50 10 2.7

80 to 100 12 2.7

125 to 150 16 3.6

200 to 300 19 5.3

The end of the steel rods shall be threaded and not welded to the threaded bolt.

All pipe work shall be carried out in a proper workman like manner, causing minimum disturbance tothe existing services, buildings, roads and structure. The entire piping work shall be organized inconsultation with other agencies work, so that area can be carried out in one stretch.

Cut-outs in the floor slab for installing the various pipes area are indicated in the drawings.Contractor shall carefully examine the cut-outs provided and clearly point out wherever the cut-outsshown in the drawings, do not meet with the requirements.

Pipe sleeves, larger diameter than pipes, shall be provided wherever pipes pass through walls andslab and annular space filled with fibreglass and finished with retainer rings.

The contractor shall make sure that the clamps, brackets, saddles and hangers provided for pipesupports are adequate or as specified / approved by Consultants. Piping layout shall take due carefor expansion and contraction in pipes and include expansion joints where required.

All pipes shall be accurately cut to the required sizes in accordance with relevant BIS codes andburrs removed before laying. Open ends of the piping shall be closed as the pipe is installed to avoidentrance of foreign matter. Where reducers are to be made in horizontal runs, eccentric reducesshall be used for the piping to drain freely. In other locations, concentric reduces may be used.

Automatic air valves shall be provided at all high points in the piping system for venting. All valvesshall be of 15mm pipe size and shall be associated with an equal size gate valves. Automatic airvalves shall be provided on hot water risers.

Discharge from the air valves shall be piped through a pipe to the nearest drain or sump. All pipesshall be pitched towards drain points.


87

Pressure gauges shall be provided as shown on the approved drawings. Care shall be taken toprotect pressure gauges during pressure testing.

2.4 PIPE FITTINGS

Pipe fittings mean tees, elbows, couplings, unions, flanges, reducers etc and all such connectingdevices that are needed to complete the piping work in its totality.

Fabricated fittings shall not be permitted for pipes diameters 50mm and below.

When fabricated fittings are used, they shall be fabricated, welded in workshops. They shall beinspected by Engineer-In-Charge before dispatch from the workshop. The welding procedures of theworkshop should have been approved by the rules for sprinkler system and applicable to hydrantand sprinkler system. For “T” connection, pipes shall be drilled and reamed. Cutting by gas orelectrical welding shall not be permitted.

2.5 JOINTING

2.5.1 WELDED JOINTS :

Joints between MS pipes and fittings shall be made with the pipes and fittings having “V” groove andwelded with electrical resistance welding in an approved manner. But welding without “V” grooveshall not be permitted.

All joints in the pipe line with screwed fittings shall be seal welded after testing and the weld plus theadjoining portion shall be given two coats of zinc rich primer.

2.5.2 FLANGED JOINTS (65 MM DIA AND ABOVE)

Flanged joints with flanges conforming to IS: 6392 shall be provided on

A. Straight runs at intervals not exceeding 25-30m on pipe lines of 50 mm dia and above and asdirected

by the Engineer-In-Charge.

B. For jointing all types of valves, appurtenances, pumps, connections with other type of pipes, towater

tanks and other places necessary and as required for good engineering practice and asshown/noted

on the drawings.

C. Flanges shall be with GI bolts and nuts and 3mm insertion gasket of natural rubber conforming toIS:

11149.

2.5.3 UNIONS (UPTO 50 MM DIA)

Approved type of dismountable unions shall be provided on pipe lines of 40 mm dia and smaller dia,in locations similar to those specified for flanges.

3. AIR VESSEL

The air vessel shall be provided to compensate for slight loss of pressure in the system and toprovide an air cushion for counter-acting pressure, surges, whenever the pumping sets come intooperation. Air vessel shall conform to IS:3844. It shall be normally half full of water, when the systemis in normal operation. Air vessel shall be fabricated with 8 mm thick M.S. plate with dished ends andsuitable supporting legs. It shall be provided with one 100 mm dia flanged connection from pump,one 25 mm drain with valve, one water level gauge and 25 mm sockets for pressure switches. Theair vessel shall be tested to pressure for 12 hours at 2 times the operating pressure or 1.5 times theshut-off.


88

4. AIR CUSHION TANK

Every wet riser shall be provided with an air cushion tank at its top most point. The air cushion shallbe provided with an automatic air release cock, 20 mm dia drain pipe, drain valve and shut off valve.

5 SYSTEM DRAINAGE

The system shall be provided with suitable drainage arrangement with drain valves complete with allaccessories.

6 VALVE CHAMBERS

Provision of suitable brick masonary chambers in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) oncement concrete foundations 150 mm thick 1:5:10 mix (1 cement: 5 fine sand: 10 graded stoneaggregate 20 mm nominal size) with 15 mm thick cement plaster inside and outside finished with aplaster inside and outside finished with a floated coat of neat cement inside with cast iron surfacebox approved by fire brigade including excavation, back-filling complete shall be made.

7. VALVES

7.1 SLUICE VALVES

Sluice valves shall be double flanged valves with cast iron body. The spindle, wall seat and wedgenuts shall be of bronze. They shall generally have non-rising spindle and shall be of the particularduty and design called for.

The valves shall be supplied with suitable flanges, non- corrosive bolts and asbestos fibre gaskets.Sluice valves shall conform to Indian Standard IS: 780-1969 and IS: 2906.

7.2 BUTTERFLY VALVE

The butterfly valve shall be suitable for waterworks and rated for 300 P.S.I

The body shall be of cast iron to IS: 210 in circular shape and of high strength to take the waterpressure. The disc shall be heavy duty cast iron with anti corrosive epoxy or nickel coating.

The valve seat shall be of high grade elastomer or nitrile rubber. The valve is closed position shallhave complete contact between the seat and the disc throughout the perimeter. The elastomerrubber shall have a long life and shall not give away on continuous applied water pressure. Theshaft shall be EN 8 grade carbon steel.

The valve shall be fitted between two flanges on either side of pipe flanges. The valve edge rubbershall be projected outside such that they are wedged within the pipe flanges to prevent leakages.

7.3 BALL VALVE

The ball valve shall be made forged brass and suitable for test pressure of pipe line. The valve shallbe internally threaded to receive pipe connections.

The ball shall be made from brass and machined to perfect round shape and subsequently chromeplated. The seat of the valve body-bonnet gasket and gland packing shall be of Teflon.

The handle shall be provided with PVC jacket. The handle shall also indicate the direction of ‘open’and ‘closed’ situations. The gap between the ball and the Teflon packing shall be sealed to preventwater seeping.

The handle shall also be provided with a lug to keep the movement of the ball valve within 90°. Thelever shall be operated smoothly and without application of any unnecessary force.

7.4 GUN METAL VALVES


89

Gun metal Valves shall be used for smaller dia pipes, and for threaded connections. The Valvesshall bear certification as per IS: 778

The body and bonnet shall be of gun metal to IS: 318. The stem gland and gland nut shall be offorged brass to IS: 6912. The hand wheel shall be of cast iron to IS: 210.

The Hand wheel shall be of high quality finish to avoid hand abrasions. Movement shall also beeasy. The spindle shall be non rising type.

7.5 NON-RETURN VALVE

Non-Return valves shall be cast iron double flanged with cast iron body and gunmetal internal partsconforming to IS: 5312.

7.6 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

Each System shall be provided with a Pressure Relief Valves. The Valve shall be spring actuatedand set to operate as per field requirement. The Valve shall be constructed of bronze and providedwith an open discharge orifice for releasing the water. The Valve shall be open lift type.

8. PRESSURE SWITCH

The pressure switches shall be employed for starting and shutting down operation of pumpsautomatically, dictated by line pressure. The Pressure Switch shall be diaphragm type. The housingshall be die cast aluminium, with SS 316 movement, pressure element and socket. The set pressureshall be adjustable.

The Switch shall be suitable for consistent and repeated operations without change in values. It shallbe provided with IP: 55 water and environment protection.

9 PRESSURE GAUGE

Pressure gauge shall be provided near all individual connections of the hydrant system with isolationvalves and near each flow switch assembly of the sprinkler system. Pressure gauge shall be 50 mmdia gunmetal bourdon type with gunmental isolation ball valve, tapping and connecting pipe andnipple. The gauge shall be installed at appropriate height for easy readability.

10 PAINTING

All Hydrant and Sprinkler pipes shall be painted with post office red colour paint. All M S pipes shallfirst be cleaned thoroughly before application of primer coat. After application of primer coat twocoats of enamel paint shall be applied. Each coat shall be given minimum 24 hours drying time. Nothinners shall be used. Wherever required all pipe headers shall be worded indicating the directionof the pipe and its purpose such as "TO RISER NO.1" etc.

Painting shall be expertly applied; the paint shall not over run on surfaces not requiring painting suchas walls, surfaces etc. Nuts and bolts shall be painted black, while valves shall be painted blue.

11. FIRE HYDRANTS11.1.1 INTERNAL HYDRANTS

A. Contractor shall provide on each landing and other locations as shown on the drawings doubleheaded gunmetal landing valve with 100 mm dia inlet as per IS:5290, with shut off valves havingcast iron wheels as shown on the drawings. Landing valve shall have flanged inlet andinstantaneous type outlets as shown on the drawings.

B. Instantaneous outlets for fire hydrants shall be standard pattern and suitable for fire hoses.

C. Contractor shall provide for each internal fire hydrant station two numbers of 63 mm dia. 15 mlong ruberized fabric lined hose pipes with gunmetal male and female instantaneous type couplingmachine would with GI wire (hose to IS:636 type 2 and couplings to IS:903 with IS certification), fire


90

hose reel, gunmetal branch pipe with nozzle to IS:903. This shall be measured and paid forseparately.

D. Contractor shall provide standard fire hose reels of 20mm dia high pressure dunlop rubber hose36.5 m long with gunmetal nozzle, all mounted on a circular hose reel of heavy duty mild steelconstruction having cast iron brackets. Hose reel shall be connected directly to the wet riser with anisolating valve. Hose reel shall conform to IS:884 and shall be mounted vertically . This shall bemeasured and paid for separately.

E. Each internal hydrant hose cabinet shall be provided with a drain in the bottom plate. The drainpoint shall be lead away to the nearest general drain.

F. Each internal hydrant hose cabinet containing items as above shall also be provided with a nozzlespanner and a Fireman’s Axe. The cabinet shall be recessed in the wall as directed. This shall bemeasured and paid for separately.

G. Each hose cabinet shall be conspicuously painted with the letters “FIRE HOSE”.

11.1.2 HOSE REEL

Hose reel shall conform to IS : 884, heavy duty, 20 mm dia length shall be 36 metre long fitted withgun metal chromium plated nozzle, mild steel pressed reel drum which can swing upto 170 degreewith wall brackets of cast iron finished with red and black enamel complete.

11.1.3 FIRE HOSE

All hose pipes shall be of 63 mm diameter RRL/ CP as required, conforming to IS : 636 or IS : 8423.The hose shall be provided with copper alloy delivery coupling. The hose shall be capable ofwithstanding a bursting pressure of 35.7 Kg/Sq.cm without undue leakage or sweating. Hose shallbe provided with instantaneous spring-lock, type couplings.

11.1.4 BRANCH PIPE, NOZZLE

Branch pipes shall be of gun metal with loaded tin bronze ring at the discharge and to receive thenozzle and provided at the other with a leaded tin bronze ring to fit into the instantaneous coupling.Nozzle shall be of spray type of diameter of not less than 16 mm and not more than 25 mm. Nozzleshall be of loaded tin bronze branch pipe and nozzle shall be of instantaneous pattern conforming toIndian Standard - 903.

11.1.5 HOSE CABINET

Hose cabinet shall be provided for all internal and external fire hydrants. Hose cabinets shall befabricated from 16 gauge MS powder coated sheet of fully welded constrcution with hinged doublefront door partially glazed (3 mm glass panel) with locking arrangement, stove enamelled fire redpaint (shade No. 536 of IS:5) with “FIRE HOSE” written on it prominently (size as given in theschedule of quantities). Cabinet surfaces in contact with the walls shall not be powder coated butinstead given two coats of anti-corrosive bitumastic paint.

11.1.6 INTERNAL HOSE CABINET


91

Hose cabinet shall be of glass fronted with hinged door & lock. The cabinet shall be made of 16gauge thick MS sheet and spray painted to shade No. 536 of IS: 5. The hose cabinet shall be of sizeto accommodate the following:

A. Landing Valves (Single/double headed)B. Hose pipe

C. Hose reel (36.5 mtr.)D. Branch pipes, nozzles (2 sets)

E. Fire man's axe and hand appliances


92

FIRE DETECTION & ALARM SYSTEM (FDA)TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 72 for ProtectedPremises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification.The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors.The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under theappropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and theinstallation shall be in compliance with the UL listing.

1.2 SCOPE:A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall beinstalled in accordance to the project specifications and drawings.

1.2.1 Basic Performance:Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall beencoded on NFPA Style 6 (Class A) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style D) as part of anaddressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style Z) as part of anaddressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.On Style 6 or 7 (Class A) configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on thesystem Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating poweror the ability to report an alarm.Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (oroutage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.NAC speaker circuits shall be arranged such that there is a minimum of one speakercircuit per floor of the building or smoke zone which ever is greater.Audio amplifiers and tone generating equipment shall be electrically supervised fornormal and abnormal conditions.NAC speaker circuits and control equipment shall be arranged such that loss of any one(1) speaker circuit will not cause the loss of any other speaker circuit in the system.Two-way telephone communication circuits shall be supervised for open and short circuitconditions.

2.0 DRAWINGS & TECHNICAL SUBMITTALS2.1 General:

Two copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review.All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein isintended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalentcompatible UL-listed equipment from other manufacturers may be substituted for thespecified equipment as long as the minimum standards are met.For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that suchsubstitute equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and qualityof the specified equipment.

2.1.1 Shop Drawings:Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance withdrawings and specifications.Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements,equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, andconduit layouts.Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations.


93

2.1.2 Manuals:

Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenancemanuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets.Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnectionsbetween the items of equipment.Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the informationrequired to properly operate the equipment and system.

2.1.3 Software Modifications :

Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all systemsoftware modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the siteshall not exceed 4 hours.Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary tomodify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion ofdevices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes fordevices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type orextent of software modifications on-site.

2.1.4 Certifications:

Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipmentmanufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation and the proposedperformer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the majorequipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the certification.

2.1.5 WARRANTY:

All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall befree from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year from the date ofacceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct anydefect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

3.1 The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification.The system shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, ifapplicable.

A) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA:

NFPA 13 Sprinkler SystemsNFPA 16 Foam/Water Deluge and Spray SystemsNFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing SystemsNFPA 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing SystemsNFPA 2001 Clean Agent Extinguishing SystemsNFPA 72 National Fire Alarm CodeNFPA 76 Telecommunication FacilitiesNFPA 318 Clean Room ApplicationsNFPA 101 Life Safety CodeNFPA 90A Air conditioning & ventilation system

B) Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA:

UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling SystemsUL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 9th Edition

ListedUL 268 A Smoke Detectors for Duct ApplicationsUL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling SystemsUL 464 Audible Signaling AppliancesUL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes


94

UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling SystemsUL 1971 Visual Notification AppliancesUL 228 Door Holders

3.2 NATIONAL BUILDING CODES

3.2.1 DELHI FIRE CODES

The Video Display Terminal (VDT) shall comply with Swedish magnetic emission and X-radiation guidelines MPR 1990:10.

3.2.2 APPROVALS:

The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationallyrecognized agencies:UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc (9th Edition)The fire alarm control panel shall meet UL Standard 864 9th Edition (Control Units)The system shall be listed by the national agencies as suitable for extinguishing releaseapplications. The system shall support release of high and low pressure CO2.

4.0 PRODUCTS

4.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL:

All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. Thematerials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationallyrecognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meetingthe National Fire Alarm Code.All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers'recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiringdiagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning systeminstallation.All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be heldfirmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings).Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.

5.0 CONDUIT AND WIRE:

5.1 Conduit:Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and staterequirements.Where required, all wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall notexceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables arecontained within a single conduit.Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, andshall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors,per NEC Article 760-29.Wiring for 24 volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similarpower-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating andsignaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices andthe system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits withoutinterference or loss of signals.Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted controlpanel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACPmanufacturer.Conduit shall be 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) minimum.

5.2 Wire:

All fire alarm system wiring shall be new.Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760)and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of


95

conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not lessthan 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and 14AWG (1.63 mm) for Notification Appliance Circuits.

All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for usewith a protective signaling system.Wire and cable shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the installation as indicatedin NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLR).Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and unshieldedand support a minimum wiring distance of 12,500 feet. The design of the system shallpermit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC communicationcircuit.All field wiring shall be electrically supervised for open circuit and ground fault.The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of t-tapping Class B (NFPA Style 4)Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs). Systems that do not allow or have restrictions in, forexample, the amount of t-taps, length of t-taps etc., are not acceptable.Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets:All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose.Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, waterflow).Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connectedto intelligent reporting devices.The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit,maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panelas FIRE ALARM. Fire alarm control panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. Thecontrol panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water pipe or groundingrod.

6.0 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL OR NETWORK NODE:

The main FACP Central Console shall contain a microprocessor based CentralProcessing Unit (CPU). The CPU shall communicate with and control the following typesof equipment used to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal(heat) detectors, addressable modules, panel modules including initiating circuits, controlcircuits, and notification appliance circuits, local and remote operator terminals, printers,annunciators, and other system controlled devices.

6.1. In conjunction with intelligent Loop Control Modules and Loop Expander Modules, themain FACP shall perform the following functions:a. Supervise and monitor all intelligent addressable detectors and monitor modules

connected to the system for normal, trouble and alarm conditions.b. Supervise all initiating signaling and notification circuits throughout the facility by

way of connection to monitor and control modules.c. Detect the activation of any initiating device and the location of the alarm

condition. Operate all notification appliances and auxiliary devices asprogrammed. In the event of CPU failure, all SLC loop modules shall fallback todegrade mode. Such degrade mode shall treat the corresponding SLC loopcontrol modules and associated detection devices as conventional two-wireoperation. Any activation of a detector in this mode shall automatically activateassociated Notification Appliance Circuits.

d. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble, supervisory, security or alarmcondition on operator's terminals, panel display, and annunciators.1. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the

system initiating devices or appliances, the following functions shallimmediately occur:a. The system alarm LED shall flash.b. A local piezo-electric audible device in the control panel shall

sound a distinctive signal.c. The 640-character backlit LCD display shall indicate all

information associated with the fire alarm condition, including thetype of alarm point and its location within the protected premises.

d. Printing and history storage equipment shall log and print theevent information along with a time and date stamp.


96

e. All system outputs assigned via preprogrammed equations for aparticular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associatedsystem outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shallbe activated.

2. When a trouble condition is detected and reported by one of the systeminitiating devices or appliances, the following functions shall immediatelyoccur:a. The system trouble LED shall flash.b. A local piezo-electric audible device in the control panel shall


information associated with the trouble condition, including thetype of trouble point and its location within the protectedpremises.


e. All system outputs assigned via preprogrammed equations for aparticular point in trouble shall be executed, and the associatedsystem outputs (trouble notification appliances and/or relays)shall be activated.

3. When a supervisory condition is detected and reported by one of thesystem initiating devices or appliances, the following functions shallimmediately occur:a. The system trouble LED shall flash.b. A local piezo-electric audible device in the control panel shall

sound a distinctive signal.

c. The 640-character backlit LCD display shall indicate allinformation associated with the supervisory condition, includingthe type of trouble point and its location within the protectedpremises.


e. All system outputs assigned via preprogrammed equations for aparticular point in trouble shall be executed, and the associatedsystem outputs (notification appliances and/or relays) shall beactivated.

4. When a security alarm condition is detected and reported by one of thesystem initiating devices or appliances, the following functions shallimmediately occur:a. The system security LED shall flash.b. A local piezo-electric audible device in the control panel shall





5. When a pre-alarm condition is detected and reported by one of thesystem initiating devices or appliances, the following functions shallimmediately occur:a. The system pre-alarm LED shall flash.b. A local piezo-electric audible device in the control panel shall




97



7.0 Operator Control

1. Acknowledge Switch:a. Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new

alarms and/or troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signaland change the alarm and trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady-ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of thisswitch shall advance the LCD display to the next alarm or troublecondition. In addition, the FACP shall support Block Acknowledge toallow multiple trouble conditions to be acknowledged with a singledepression of this switch.

b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remoteannunciator piezo sounders.

7.0 Signal Silence Switch:

Depression of the Signal Silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notificationappliances and relays to return to the normal condition. The selection of notificationcircuits and relays that are silence able by this switch shall be fully field programmablewithin the confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silenceinhibit and auto-silence timers.1. Drill Switch:

Depression of the Drill switch shall activate all programmed notification appliancecircuits. The drill function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset.

2. System Reset Switch:Depression of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically latchedinitiating devices to return to their normal condition. Initiating devices shall re-report if active. Active notification appliance circuits shall not silence upon Reset.Systems that de-activate and subsequently re-activate notification appliancecircuits shall not be considered equal. All programmed Control-By-Eventequations shall be re-evaluated after the reset sequence is complete if theinitiating condition has cleared. Non-latching trouble conditions shall not clearand re-report upon reset.

3. Lamp Test:The Lamp Test switch shall activate all local system LEDs, light each segment ofthe liquid crystal display and display the panel software revision for servicepersonal.

4. Scroll Display Keys:There shall be Scroll Display keys for FIRE ALARM, SECURITY,SUPERVISORY, TROUBLE, and OTHER EVENTS. Depression of the ScrollDisplay key shall display the next event in the selected queue allowing theoperator to view events by type.

5. Print Screen:Depression of the PRINT SCREEN switch shall send the information currentlydisplayed on the 640-character display to the printer.

9.0 System Capacity and General Operation

1. The control panel shall be capable of expansion via up to 10 SLC modules.Each module shall support a maximum of 318 analog/addressable devices for amaximum system capacity of 3180 points. The system shall be capable of 3072annunciation points per system regardless of the number of addressable devices.

2. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interfacecontrol and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit 640-character liquid


98

crystal display, individual, color coded system status LEDs, and a QWERTY stylealphanumeric keypad for the field programming and control of the fire alarmsystem. Said LCD shall also support graphic bit maps capable of displaying thecompany name and logo of either the Engineer In charge or installing company.

3. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall beachieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoringfunctions of the fire alarm control panel.

1.0 The FACP shall be able to provide the following software and hardwarefeatures:

10.1 a. Pre-signal and Positive Alarm Sequence: The system shall provide means tocause alarm signals to only sound in specific areas with a delay of the alarm from60 to up to 180 seconds after start of alarm processing. In addition, a PositiveAlarm Sequence selection shall be available that allows a 15-second time periodfor acknowledging an alarm signal from a fire detection/initiating device. If thealarm is not acknowledged within 15 seconds, all local and remote outputs shallautomatically activate immediately.

b. Smoke Detector Pre-alarm Indication at Control Panel: To obtain early warning ofincipient or potential fire conditions, the system shall support a programmableoption to determine system response to real-time detector sensing values abovethe programmed setting. Two levels of Pre-alarm indication shall be available atthe control panel: alert and action.

c. Alert: It shall be possible to set individual smoke detectors for pre-programmedpre-alarm thresholds. If the individual threshold is reached, the pre-alarmcondition shall be activated.

d. Action: If programmed for action, and the detector reaches a level exceeding thepre-programmed level, the control panel shall indicate an action condition.Sounder bases installed with either heat or smoke detectors shall automaticallyactivate on action Pre-Alarm level, with general evacuation on alarm level.

e. The system shall support a detector response time to meet world annunciationrequirements of less than 3 seconds.

f. Device Blink Control: Means shall be provided to turn off detector/module LEDstrobes for special areas.

g. NFPA 72 Smoke Detector Sensitivity Test: The system shall provide anautomatic smoke detector test function that meet the requirements of NFPA 72.

h. Programmable Trouble Reminder: The system shall provide means toautomatically initiate a reminder that troubles exist in the system. The reminderwill appear on the system display and (if enabled) will sound a piezo alarm.

i. On-line or Off-line programming: The system shall provide means to allow panelprogramming either through an off-line software utility program away from thepanel or while connected and on-line. The system shall also support upload anddownload of programmed database and panel executive system program to aPersonal Computer/laptop.

j. History Events: The panel shall maintain a history file of the last 4000 events,each with a time and date stamp. History events shall include all alarms,troubles, operator actions, and programming entries. The control panels shallalso maintain a 1000 event Alarm History buffer, which consists of the 1000 mostrecent alarm events from the 4000 event history file.

k. Smoke Control Modes: The system shall provide means to perform FSCS modeSmoke Control to meet NFPA-92A and 90B and HVAC mode to meet NFPA 90A.


99

l. The system shall provide means for all SLC devices on any SLC loop to be autoprogrammed into the system by specific address. The system shall recognizespecific device type ID’s and associate that ID with the corresponding address ofthe device.

m. Drill: The system shall support means to activate all silenceable fire outputcircuits in the event of a practice evacuation or “drill”. If enabled for local control,the front panel switch shall be held for a minimum of 2 seconds prior to activatingthe drill function

n. Passwords and Users: The system shall support two password levels, masterand user. Up to 9 user passwords shall be available, each of which may beassigned access to the programming change menus, the alter status menus, orboth. Only the master password shall allow access to password change screens.

o. Block Acknowledge: The system shall support a block Acknowledge for TroubleConditions.

p. Sensitivity Adjust: The system shall provide Automatic Detector Sensitivity Adjustbased on Occupancy schedules including a Holiday list of up to 15 days.

r. Environmental Drift Control: The system shall provide means for settingEnvironmental Drift Compensation by device. When a detector accumulates dustin the chamber and reaches an unacceptable level but yet still below the allowedlimit, the control panel shall indicate a maintenance alert warning. When thedetector accumulates dust in the chamber above the allowed limit, the controlpanel shall indicate a maintenance urgent warning.

s. Custom Action Messages: The system shall provide means to enter up to 100custom action messages of up to 160 characters each. It shall be possible toassign any of the 100 messages to any point.

t. Print Functions: The system shall provide means to obtain a variety of reportslisting all event, alarm, trouble, supervisory, or security history. Additional reportsshall be available for point activation for the last Walk Test performed, detectormaintenance report containing the detector maintenance status of each installedaddressable detector, all network parameters, all panel settings including broadcast time, event ordering, and block acknowledge, panel timer values for AutoSilence, Silence Inhibit, AC Fail Delay time and if enabled, Proprietary Reminder,and Remote Reminder timers, supervision settings for power supply and printers,all programmed logic equations, all custom action messages, all non-fire andoutput activations (if pre-programmed for logging) all active points filtered byalarms only, troubles only, supervisory alarms, prealarms, disabled points andactivated points, all installed points filtered by SLC points, panel circuits, logiczones, annunicators, releasing zones, spal zones, and trouble zones.

u. Local Mode: If communication is lost to the central processor the system shallprovide added survivability through the intelligent loop control modules. Inputsfrom devices connected to the SLC and loop control modules shall activateoutputs on the same loop when the inputs and outputs have been set with pointprogramming to participate in local mode or when the type codes are of the sametype: that is, an input with a fir alarm type code shall activate an output with a firealarm type code.

v. Resound based on type for security or supervisory: The system shall indicate aSecurity alarm when a monitor module point programmed with a security TypeCode activates. If silenced alarms exist, a Security alarm will resound the panelsounder. The system shall indicate a Supervisory alarm when a monitor modulepoint programmed with a supervisory Type Code activates. If there are silencedalarms, a Supervisory alarm will resound the panel sounder.


100

w. Read status preview - enabled and disabled points: Prior to re-enabling points,the system shall inform the user that a disabled device is in the alarm state. Thisshall provide notice that the device must be reset before the device is enabledthereby avoiding activation of the notification circuits.

x. Custom Graphics: When fitted with an LCD display, the panel shall permituploading of a custom bit-mapped graphic to the display screen. Graphic shalldisplay when all systems are normal.

y. Multi-Detector and Cooperating Detectors: The system shall provide means tolink one detector to up to two detectors at other addresses on the same loop incooperative multi-detector sensing. There shall be no requirement for sequentialaddresses on the detectors and the alarm event shall be a result or product of allcooperating detectors chamber readings.

z. Tracking/Latching Duct : The system shall support both tracking and latchingduct detectors.

aa. ACTIVE EVENT: The system shall provide a Type ID called FIRE CONTROL forpurposes of air-handling shutdown, which shall be intended to override normaloperating automatic functions. Activation of a FIRE CONTROL point shall causethe control panel to (1) initiate the monitor module Control-by-Event, (2) send amessage to the panel display, history buffer, installed printer and annunciators,(3) shall not light an indicator at the control panel, (4) Shall display ACTIVE onthe LCD as well a display a FIRE CONTROL Type Code and other informationspecific to the device.

bb. NON-FIRE Alarm Module Reporting: A point with a type ID of NON-FIRE shall beavailable for use for energy management or other non-fire situations. NON-FIREpoint operation shall not affect control panel operation nor shall it display amessage at the panel LDC. Activation of a NON-FIRE point shall activate controlby event logic but shall not cause any indication on the control panel.

cc. Security Monitor Points: The system shall provide means to monitor any point asa type security.

dd. One-Man Walk Test: The system shall provide both a basic and advanced walktest for testing the entire fire alarm system. The basic walk test shall allow asingle operator to run audible tests on the panel. All logic equation automationshall be suspended during the test and while annunciators can be enabled for thetest, all shall default to the disabled state. During an advanced walk test, field-supplied output point programming will react to input stimuli such as CBE andlogic equations. When points are activated in advanced test mode, eachinitiating event shall latch the input. The advanced test shall be audible and shallbe used for pull station verification, magnet activated tests on input devices, inputand output device and wiring operation/verification.

ee. Control By Event Functions: CBE software functions shall provide means toprogram a variety of output responses based on various initiating events. Thecontrol panel shall operate CBE through lists of zones. A zone shall becomelisted when it is added to a point’s zone map through point programming. Eachinput point such as detector, monitor module or panel circuit module shall supportlisting of up to 10 zones into its programmed zone map.

ff. Permitted zone types shall be general zone, releasing zone and special zone.Each output point (control module, panel circuit module) can support a list of upto 10 zones including general zone, logic zone, releasing zone and trouble zone.It shall be possible for output points to be assigned to list general alarm. Non-Alarm or Supervisory points shall not activate the general alarm zone.


101

gg. 1000 General Zones: The system shall support up to 1000 general purposesoftware zones for linking inputs to outputs. When an input device activates, anygeneral zone programmed into that device’s zone map will be active and anyoutput device that has an active general zone in its map will be active. It shallalso be possible to use general zone as arguments in logic equations.

hh. 1000 Logic Equations: The system shall support up to 1000 logic equations forAND, OR, NOT, ONLY1, ANYX, XZONE or RANGE operators that allowconditional I/O linking. When any logic equation becomes true, all output pointsmapped to the logic zone shall activate.

ii. 10 trouble equations per device: The system shall provide support for up to 10trouble equations for each device, which shall permit programming parameters tobe altered, based on specific fault conditions. If the trouble equation becomestrue, all output points mapped to the trouble zone shall activate.

jj. Control-By-Time: A time based logic function shall be available to delay an actionfor a specific period of time based upon a logic input with tracking feature. Alatched version shall also be available. Another version of this shall permitactivation on specific days of the week or year with ability to set and restorebased on a 24 hour time schedule on any day of the week or year.

kk. Multiple agent releasing zones: The system shall support up to 10 releasingzones to protect against 10 independent hazards. Releasing zones shall provideup to three cross-zone with four abort options to satisfy any local jurisdictionrequirements.

ll. Alarm Verification, by device, with timer and tally: The system shall provide auser-defined global software timer function that can be set for a specific detectoror indicating panel module input. The timer function shall delay an alarm signalfor a user-specified time period and the control panel shall ignore the alarmverification timer if another alarm is detected during the verification period. Itshall also be possible to set a maximum verification count between 0 and 20 withthe “0” setting producing no alarm verification. When the counter exceeds thethreshold value entered, a trouble shall be generated to the panel.

10.2 Central Processing Unit

10.2.1. The Central Processing Unit shall communicate with, monitor, and control all othermodules within the control panel. Removal, disconnection or failure of any control panelmodule shall be detected and reported to the system display by the Central ProcessingUnit.

10.2.2. The Central Processing Unit shall contain and execute all control-by-event (includingBoolean functions including but not limited to AND, OR, NOT, ANYx, and CROSSZONE)programs for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system.Such control-by-event programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, andshall not be lost with system primary and secondary power failure.

10.2.3. The Central Processing Unit shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation, tothe second, of all system events. The time-of-day and date shall not be lost if systemprimary and secondary power supplies fail.

10.2.4 The CPU shall be capable of being programmed on site without requiring the use of anyexternal programming equipment. Systems that require the use of external programmersor change of EPROMs are not acceptable.

10.2.5 Consistent with UL864 standards, the CPU and associated equipment are to beprotected so that voltage surges or line transients will not affect them.

10.2.6 Each peripheral device connected to the CPU shall be continuously scanned for properoperation. Data transmissions between the CPU and peripheral devices shall be reliable


102

and error free. The transmission scheme used shall employ dual transmission or otherequivalent error checking techniques.

10.2.7 The CPU shall provide an EIA-232 interface between the fire alarm control panel and theUL Listed Electronic Data Processing (EDP) peripherals.

10.2.8 The CPU shall provide two EIA-485 ports for the serial connection to annunciation andcontrol subsystem components.

10.2.9 The EIA-232 serial output circuit shall be optically isolated to assure protection from earthground.

10.2.10 The CPU shall provide one high-speed serial connection for support of networkcommunication modules.

10.2.11 The CPU shall provide double pole relays for FIRE ALARM, SYSTEM TROUBLE,SUPERVISORY, and SECURITY. The SUPERVISORY and SECURITY relays shallprovide selection for additional FIRE ALARM contacts.

10.3 Display

10.3.1 The system display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the systemoperator and may also be used to program all system operational parameters.

10.3.2 The display assembly shall contain, and display as required, custom alphanumeric labelsfor all intelligent detectors, addressable modules, and software zones.

10.3.3 The system display shall provide a 640-character backlit alphanumeric Liquid CrystalDisplay (LCD). It shall also provide ten Light-Emitting-Diodes (LEDs), that indicate thestatus of the following system parameters: AC POWER, FIRE ALARM, PREALARM,SECURITY, SUPERVISORY, SYSTEM TROUBLE, OTHER EVENT, SIGNALSSILENCED, POINT DISABLED, and CPU FAILURE.

10.3.4 The system display shall provide a QWERTY style keypad with control capability tocommand all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and fieldprogramming. Two different password levels with up to ten (one Master and nine User)passwords shall be accessible through the display interface assembly to preventunauthorized system control or programming.

10.3.5 The system display shall include the following operator control switches:ACKNOWLEDGE, SIGNAL SILENCE, RESET, DRILL, and LAMP TEST. Additionally,the display interface shall allow scrolling of events by event type including, FIRE ALARM,SECURITY, SUPERVISORY, TROUBLE, and OTHER EVENTS. A PRINT SCREENbutton shall be provided for printing the event currently displayed on the 640-characterLCD.

10.4 Loop (Signaling Line Circuit) Control Module:

10.4.1 The Loop Control Module shall monitor and control a minimum of 318 intelligentaddressable devices. This includes 159 intelligent detectors (Photoelectric, Thermal etc.)and 159 monitor or control modules.

10.4.2 The Loop Control Module shall contain its own microprocessor and shall be capable ofoperating in a local/degrade mode (any addressable device input shall be capable ofactivating any or all addressable device outputs) in the unlikely event of a failure in themain CPU.

10.4.3 The Loop Control Module shall provide power and communicate with all intelligentaddressable detectors and modules on a single pair of wires. This SLC Loop shall becapable of operating as a NFPA Style 6 (Class B) circuit.


103

10.4.4 The SLC interface board shall be able to drive an NFPA Style 6 twisted shielded circuitup to 12,500 feet in length. The SLC Interface shall also be capable of driving an NFPAStyle 6, no twist, no shield circuit up to 3,000 feet in length. In addition, SLC wiring shallmeet the listing requirements for it to exit the building or structure. "T"-tapping shall beallowed in either case.

10.4.5 The SLC interface board shall receive analog or digital information from all intelligentdetectors and shall process this information to determine whether normal, alarm, ortrouble conditions exist for that particular device. Each SLC Loop shall be isolated andequipped to annunciate an Earth Fault condition. The SLC interface board software shallinclude software to automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level byadjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust ineach detector. The analog information may also be used for automatic detector testingand the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements.

10.5 Enclosures:

10.5.1 The control panel shall be housed in a UL-listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi-flushmounting. The cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant primecoat, and manufacturer's standard finish.

10.5.2 The back box and door shall be constructed of 0.060 steel with provisions for electricalconduit connections into the sides and top.

10.5.3 The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent openingfor viewing of all indicators. For convenience, the door may be site configured for eitherright or left hand hinging.

10.5.4 The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance, andfuture expansion.

10.6 Power Supply:

10.6.1 The Addressable Main Power Supply shall operate on 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, and shallprovide all necessary power for the FACP.

10.6.2 The Addressable Main Power Supply shall provide sufficient power to the CPU, using aswitching 24 VDC regulator and shall incorporate a battery charger for 24 hours ofstandby power using dual-rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge.

10.6.3 The Addressable Main Power Supply shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours ofstandby using dual-rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge. The supply shallbe capable of charging batteries ranging in capacity from 25-200 amp-hours within a 48-hour period.

10.6.4 The Addressable Main Power Supply shall provide a very low frequency sweep earthdetect circuit, capable of detecting earth faults.

10.6.5 The Addressable Main Power Supply shall be power-limited per 1995 UL864requirements.

10.7 Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (UDACT).

The UDACT is an interface for communicating digital information between a fire alarmcontrol panel and an UL-Listed central station.

10.7.1 The UDACT shall be compact in size, mounting in a standard module position of the firealarm control cabinet. Optionally, the UDACT shall have the ability for remote mounting,up to 6,000 feet from the fire alarm control panel. The wire connections between theUDACT and the control panel shall be supervised with one pair for power and one pair formultiplexed communication of overall system status. Systems that utilize relay contactclosures are not acceptable.


104

10.7.2 The UDACT shall include connections for dual telephone lines (with voltage detect), perUL/NFPA/FCC requirements. It shall include the ability for split reporting of panel eventsup to three different telephone numbers.

10.7.3 The UDACT shall be completely field programmable from a built-in keypad and 4character red, seven segment display.

10.7.4 The UDACT shall be capable of transmitting events in at least 15 different formats. Thisensures compatibility with existing and future transmission formats.

10.7.5 Communication shall include vital system status such as:

- Independent Zone (Alarm, trouble, non-alarm, supervisory)- Independent Addressable Device Status- AC (Mains) Power Loss- Low Battery and Earth Fault- System Off Normal- 12 and 24 Hour Test Signal- Abnormal Test Signal (per UL requirements)- EIA-485 Communications Failure- Phone Line Failure

10.7.6 The UDACT shall support independent zone/point reporting when used in the Contact IDformat. In this format the UDACT shall support transmission of up to 2,040 points. Thisenables the central station to have exact details concerning the origin of the fire orresponse emergency.

11.0 Stand Alone Voice Evacuation Control Panel

11.1 A stand alone Voice Evacuation Control Panel shall be available from the samemanufacturer of the main fire alarm system.

11.2 This Voice Control Panel shall work stand alone or as a slave to the Main Control Panel.

11.3 Shall have as minimum requirements:

a. Integral 25 Watt, 25 Vrms audio amplifier.b. Speaker circuit that can be wired both Class A or B.c. Integral Digital Message Generator with a capacity of up to 60 seconds. The

Digital Message Generator shall be capable of primary and secondary messages(30 seconds each). These messages shall field programmable without the use ofadditional equipment.

d. Built in alert tone generators with steady, slow woop, high/low and chime tonefield programmable.

e. Integral Diagnostic LEDs for Power, System Trouble, Message GeneratorTrouble, Tone Generator Trouble, and Alarm.

The Voice Control Panel shall be fully supervised including microphone, amplifier output,message generator, speaker wiring, and tone generators.

Speaker outputs shall be fully power-limited.

12.0 Auxiliary Field Power Supply – Addressable

12.1 The auxiliary addressable power supply is a remote 24 VDC power supply used to powerNotification Devices and field devices that require regulated 24VDC power. The powersupply shall also include and charge backup batteries.

12.2 The addressable power supply for the fire alarm system shall provide up a minimum of6.0 amps of 24 volt DC regulated power for Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) power or5 amps of 24 volt DC general power. The power supply shall have an additional .5 amp of


105

24 VDC auxiliary power for use within the same cabinet as the power supply. It shallinclude an integral charger designed to charge 7.0 - 25.0 amp hour batteries.

12.3 The addressable power supply shall provide four individually addressable NotificationAppliance Circuits that may be configured as two Class "A" and two Class "B" or fourClass "B" only circuits. All circuits shall be power-limited per UL 864 requirements.

12.4 The addressable power supply shall provide built-in synchronization for certainNotification Appliances on each circuit without the need for additional synchronizationmodules. The power supply's output circuits shall be individually selected forsynchronization. A single addressable power supply shall be capable of supporting bothsynchronized and non-synchronized Notification Devices at the same time.

12.5 The addressable power supply shall operate on 120 or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.

12.6 The interface to the power supply from the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall be viathe Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) or other multiplexed means. Power supplies that do notuse an intelligent interface are not suitable substitutes. The required wiring from theFACP to the addressable power supply shall be a single unshielded twisted pair wire.

12.7 The addressable power supply shall supervise for battery charging failure, AC powerloss, power brownout, battery failure, NAC loss, and optional ground fault detection. Inthe event of a trouble condition, the addressable power supply shall report the incidentand the applicable address to the FACP via the SLC.

12.8 The addressable power supply shall have an AC Power Loss Delay option. If this optionis utilized and the addressable power supply experiences an AC power loss, reporting ofthe incident to the FACP will be delayed. A delay time of eight or sixteen hours shall beDip-switch selected.

12.9 The addressable power supply shall have an option for Canadian Trouble Reporting andthis option shall be Dip-switch selectable.

12.10 The addressable power supply mounts in either the FACP backbox or it's own dedicatedsurface mounted backbox with cover.

12.11 Each of the power supply's four output circuits shall be DIP-switch selected forNotification Appliance Circuit or General Purpose 24 VDC power. Any output circuit shallbe able to provide up to 2.5 amps of 24 VDC power.

12.12 The addressable power supply's output circuits shall be individually supervised whenthey are selected to be either a Notification Appliance Circuit when wired Class "A" or bythe use of and end-of-line resistor. When the power supply's output circuit is selected asGeneral 24VDC power, the circuit shall be individually supervised when an end-of-linerelay is used.

12.13 When selected for Notification Appliance Circuits, the output circuits shall be individuallyDIP-switch selectable for Steady, March Time, Dual Stage or Temporal.

12.14 When selected as a Notification Appliance Circuit, the output circuits of the addressablepower supply shall have the option to be coded by the use of a universal zone coder.

12.15 The addressable power supply shall interface and synchronize with other power suppliesof the same type. The required wiring to interface multiple addressable power suppliesshall be a single unshielded, twisted pair wire.

12.16 An individual or multiple interfaced addressable power supplies shall have the option touse an external charger for battery charging. Interfaced power supplies shall have theoption to share backup battery power.

13.0 Field Charging Power Supply: The FCPS is a device designed for use as either aremote 24 volt power supply or to power Notification Appliances and providesynchronization signals to visual strobe devices.


106

13.1 The FCPS shall be available in two models offering either up to 6.0 amps (4.0 ampscontinuous) or 8.0 amps (6.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24-volt power. It shallinclude an integral charger designed to charge 7.0 amp hour batteries and to support 60-hour standby.

13.2 The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall bea Notification Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a relay. Four outputs(two Style Y or Z and two style Y) shall be available for connection to the Notificationdevices.

13.3 The FCPS shall include an attractive surface mount backbox.

13.4 The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the AC fail delay perNFPA requirements.

13.5 The FCPS include power limited circuitry, per 1995 UL standards.

14.0 System Circuit Supervision:

14.1 The FACP shall supervise all circuits to intelligent devices, annunciators andconventional peripherals and annunciate loss of communications with these devices. TheCPU shall continuously scan above devices for proper system operation and upon loss ofresponse from a device shall sound an audible trouble, indicate that device or devicesare not responding and print the information in the history buffer and on a printer.

14.2 Sprinkler system valves, standpipe control valves, PIV and main gate valves shall besupervised for off-normal position.

15.0 Field Wiring Terminal Blocks:

All wiring terminal blocks shall be the plug-in/removable type and shall be capable ofterminating up to 12 AWG wire. Terminal blocks that are permanently fixed to the PCboard are not acceptable.

15.1 Printer

15.1.1 Printers shall be of the automatic type, printing code, time, date, location, category, andcondition.

15.1.2 The printer shall provide hard-copy printout of all changes in status of the system andshall time-stamp such printouts with the current time-of-day and date. The printer shall bestandard carriage with 80-characters per line and shall use standard pin-feed paper. Theprinter shall be enclosed in a separate cabinet suitable for placement on a desktop ortable and UL, ULC listed for use with the NFS-3030. The printer shall communicate withthe control using an interface complying with Electrical Industries Association standardEIA-232D. The printer power shall be 120 VAC @ 60 Hz.

15.1.3 Thermal printers are not acceptable.

15.1.4 The system shall have a strip printer capable of being mounted directly in the main FACPenclosure. Alarms shall be printed in easy-to-read RED, other messages, such as atrouble, shall be printed in BLACK. This printer shall receive power from the systempower supply and shall operate via battery back up if AC mains are lost. The strip printershall be UL 864 listed.

16.0 Transponders (Remotely Located Control Panels): (Repeater Panel)

16.1 Transponders shall be listed under UL category UOJZ as an independent, local fire alarmcontrol unit as well as being listed as a critical component in a multiplex fire alarmsystem. Transponders shall be located where shown on the plans.


107

The transponder shall serve as the interface between conventional initiating fire devices,controlled signaling devices, and the FACP. The supervised multiplex communicationport shall be an integral part of the transponder.

16.2 Each Transponder shall be powered from a local Power Supply, and shall provide allpower necessary for its own operation, including standby power.

16.3 Transponders shall be used to house batteries and power supplies to allow a truedistributed processing and amplification.

16.4 Each transponder shall have the following indicators and operator Controls:a. Alarm Acknowledge/Signal Silence/Reset Switchb. Power LEDc. System alarm LEDd. System trouble LEDe. Local piezoelectric signalf. Red alarm per Initiating Device Circuitg. Green on/off LED per notification appliance circuit or relay

16.5 Each transponder will be capable of expansion of up to 24 field circuits of the followingtypes in any mix:

16.6 a. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): IDCs may be added to the transponder in groupsof 8 Style B (Class B), or 4 Style D (Class A) circuits. Each circuit shall becapable of monitoring up to 30 compatible 2-wire smoke detectors, and/or anynumber of contact type initiating devices.

b. Auxiliary Control Relay Outputs: Auxiliary relay outputs may be added to thetransponder in groups of eight individually controlled single Form-C circuits.Alternately, the eight independent relays may be configured as four dual Form-C.All relay contacts shall be rated 2 A @ 30 VDC.

c. Notification Applicance Circuits: Notification Appliance Circuit outputs may beadded to the transponder in groups of 8 Class B (Style Y), or 4 Class A (Style Z)circuits. Each circuit shall be capable of being configured as a Telephone, Horn,Strobe or Speaker Circuit.

17.0 Remote Transmissions:

17.1 Provide local energy or polarity reversal or trip circuits as required.17.2 The system shall be capable of operating a polarity reversal or local energy or fire alarm

transmitter for automatically transmitting fire information to the fire department.17.3 Provide capability and equipment for transmission of zone alarm and trouble signals to

remote operator's terminals, system printers and annunciators.17.4 Transmitters shall be compatible with the systems and equipment they are connected to

such as timing, operation and other required features.

17.5 System Expansion: Design the main FACP and transponders so that the system can beexpanded in the future (to include the addition of twenty percent more circuits or zones)without disruption or replacement of the existing control panel. This shall includehardware capacity, software capacity and cabinet space.

18.0 Field Programming

18.1 The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without theneed for special tools, laptop computers, or other electronic interface equipment. Thereshall be no firmware changes required to field modify the system time, point information,equations, or annunciator programming/information.

18.2 It shall be possible to program through the standard FACP keyboard all system functions.

18.3 All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory.


108

18.4 Two levels of password protection shall be provided in addition to a key-lock cabinet. Onelevel shall be used for status level changes such as point/zone disable or manual on/offcommands(Building Manager). A second (higher-level) shall be used for actual change ofthe life safety program (installer). These passwords shall be five (5) digits at a minimum.Upon entry of an invalid password for the third time within a one minute time period anencrypted number shall be displayed. This number can be used as a reference fordetermining a forgotten password.

18.5 The system programming shall be "backed" up on a 3.5" floppy diskette utilizing anupload/download program. This system back-up disk shall be completed and given induplicate to the building Engineer In charge and/or operator upon completion of the finalinspection. The program that performs this function shall be "non-proprietary", in that, itshall be possible to forward it to the building Engineer In charge/operator upon his or herrequest.

The installer's field programming and hardware shall be functionally tested on a computeragainst known parameters/norms which are established by the FACP manufacturer. Asoftware program shall test Input-to-Output correlations, device Type ID associations,point associations, time equations, etc. This test shall be performed on an IBM-compatible PC with a verification software package. A report shall be generated of thetest results and two copies turned in to the engineer(s) on record.It shall be the responsibility of the equipment supplier /installer to ensure that allequipment supplied will fit in locations designated on plans and in the specifications.

19.0 Specific System Operations

19.1 Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity ofany or all analog intelligent smoke detectors in the system from the system keypad orfrom the keyboard of the video terminal. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed ULwindow.

19.2 Alarm Verification: Each of the Intelligent Addressable Smoke Detectors in the systemmay be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector. The alarmverification function shall be programmable from 5 to 50 seconds and each detector shallbe able to be selected for verification during the field programming of the system oranytime after system turn-on. Alarm verification shall not require any additional hardwareto be added to the control panel. The FACP shall keep a count of the number of timesthat each detector has entered the verification cycle. These counters may be displayedand reset by the proper operator commands.

19.3 System Point Operations:a. Any addressable device in the system shall have the capability to be enabled or

disabled through the system keypad or video terminal.b. System output points shall be capable of being turned on or off from the system

keypad or the video terminal.

19.4 Point Read: The system shall be able to display the following point status diagnosticfunctions without the need for peripheral equipment. Each point shall be annunciated forthe parameters listed:

a. Device Status.b. Device Type.c. Custom Device Label.d. Software Zone Label.e. Device Zone Assignments.f. Analog Detector Sensitivity.g. All Program Parameters.

19.5 System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system, a status reportwill be generated and printed, listing all system statuses:


109

19.6 System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall contain ahistory buffer that will be capable of storing up to 4000 system events. Each of theseevents will be stored, with time and date stamp, until an operator requests that thecontents be either displayed or printed. The contents of the history buffer may bemanually reviewed, one event at a time, and the actual number of activations may alsobe displayed and or printed.The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory forhistory storage are not acceptable.

19.7 Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall automaticallyinterrogate each intelligent system detector and shall analyze the detector responsesover a period of time.

If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is below or abovenormal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the particular IntelligentDetector will be annunciated on the system display, and printed on the optional systemprinter. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system,nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform.

19.8 The system shall include the ability (programmable) to indicate a "pre-alarm" condition.This will be used to alert maintenance personal when a detector is at 80% of its alarmthreshold in a 60 second period.

20.0 Network Control Annunciator

A network control annunciator shall be provided to display all system intelligent points.The NCA shall be capable of displaying all information for all 200,000 possible points onthe network. Network display devices, which are only capable of displaying a subset ofnetwork points, shall not be suitable substitutes.The NCA shall include a minimum of 640 characters, backlit by a long life, solid stateLCD display. It shall also include a full QWERTY style keypad with tactile feel.Additionally, the network display shall include ten soft-keys for screen navigation and theability to scroll events by type. i.e. Fire Alarm, Supervisory Alarm, Trouble, etc.The network control annunciator shall have the ability to display up to eight events inorder of priority and time of occurrence. Counters shall be provided to indicate the totalnumber of events by type.The NCA shall mount in any of the network node fire alarm control panels. Optionally, thenetwork display may mount in a backbox designed for this use. The network shallsupport a minimum of 103 network control annunciators (not to exceed total nodecapacity) and shall connect to the network over either a wire or fiber interface.The network control annunciator shall have an event history buffer capable of storing aminimum of 1000 events in non-volatile memory. Additionally, the NCA shall have a firealarm history buffer capable of storing a minimum of 200 events in non-volatile memory.Systems that do not protect fire alarm events from being overwritten by other events arenot suitable substitutes.The NCA shall include two optically isolated, 9600 baud, industry standard EIA-232 portsfor UL864 listed printers and CRT's. These peripheral devices shall print or displaynetwork activity.The network control annunciator shall include control switches for system wide control ofAcknowledge, Signal Silence, System Reset, Drill, and local Lamp Test. A mechanicalmeans by which the controls switches are "locked out", such as a key, shall be available.The NCA shall include long life LEDs to display Power, Fire Alarm, Pre-Alarm, SecurityAlarm, System Trouble, Supervisory, Signals Silenced, Disabled Points, Other (non-fire)Events, and CPU Failure.The network control annunciator shall include a Master password and up to nine Userpasswords. Each password shall be up to eight alpha-numeric characters in length. TheMaster password shall be authorized to access the programming and alter status menus.Each User password may have different levels of authorization assigned by the Masterpassword.The NCA shall allow editing of labels for all points within the network; control on/off ofoutputs; enable/disable of all network points; alter detector sensitivity; clear detector


110

verification counters for any analog addressable detector within the network; clear anyhistory log within the network; change the Time/Date settings; initiate a Walk Test.

The network control annunciator shall support an optional WindowsTM based programutility. This utility shall allow the user create an NCA database, upload/download an NCAdatabase, and download an upgrade to the NCA executive. To ensure program validity,this utility shall check stored databases for errors. A compare function shall be includedto identify differences between databases.For time keeping purposes the NCA shall include a time of day clock.Each NCA shall support up to 32 additional 80 character remote display annunciators fordisplaying network activity. These "Terminal Mode" displays will mimic the activityappearing on the corresponding NCA.

21.0 Digital Voice Command Center

The Digital Voice Command Center located with the FACP, shall contain all equipmentrequired for all audio control, emergency telephone system control, signaling andsupervisory functions. This shall include speaker zone indication and control, telephonecircuit indication and control, digital voice units, microphone and main telephone handset.

Function: The Voice Command Center equipment shall perform the following functions:

Operate as a supervised multi-channel emergency voice communication system.

Operate as a two-way emergency telephone system control center.

Audibly and visually annunciate the active or trouble condition of every speaker circuitand emergency telephone circuit.

Audibly and visually annunciate any trouble condition for digital tone and voice unitsrequired for normal operation of the system.

Provide all-call Emergency Paging activities through activation of a single control switch.

As required, provide vectored paging control to specific audio zones via dedicated controlswitches.

Provide a factory recorded “library” of voice messages and tones in standard WAV. Fileformat, which may be edited and saved on a PC running a current Windows® operatingsystem.

Provide a software utility capable of off-line programming for the VCC operation and theaudio message files. This utility shall support the creation of new programs as well asediting and saving existing program files. Uploading or downloading the VCC shall notinhibit the emergency operation of other nodes on the fire alarm network.

Support an optional mode of operation with four analog audio outputs capable of beingused with UL 864 fire-listed analog audio amplifiers and SCL controlled switching.

The Digital Voice Command shall be modular in construction, and shall be capable ofbeing field programmable without requiring the return of any components to themanufacturer and without requiring use of any external computers or other programmingequipment.

The Digital Voice Command and associated equipment shall be protected againstunusually high voltage surges or line transients.

22.0 Audio Amplifiers

22.1 The Audio Amplifiers will provide Audio Power (@70 Volts RMS) for distribution tospeaker circuits.

Multiple audio amplifiers may be mounted in a single enclosure, either to supplyincremental audio power, or to function as an automatically switched backup amplifier(s).


111

The audio amplifier shall include an integral power supply, and shall provide built-in LEDindicators for the following conditions:

Earth Fault on DAP A (Digital Audio Port A)Earth Fault on DAP B (Digital Audio Port B)Audio Amplifier Failure DetectedTroubleActive Alarm Bus inputAudio Detected on Aux Input AAudio Detected on Aux Input BAudio Detected on FireFighter’s Telephone RiserReceiving Audio from digital audio riserShort circuit on speaker circuit 1Short circuit on speaker circuit 2Short circuit on speaker circuit 3Short circuit on speaker circuit 4Data Transmitted on DAP AData Received on DAP AData Transmitted on DAP BData Received on DAP BBoard failureActive fiberoptic media connection on port A (fiberoptic media applications)Active fiberoptic media connection on port B (fiberoptic media applications)Power supply Earth FaultPower supply 5V presentPower supply conditions – Brownout, High Battery, Low Battery, Charger TroubleThe audio amplifier shall provide the following built-in controls:Amplifier Address Selection SwitchesSignal Silence of communication loss annunciationResetLevel adjustment for background musicEnable/Disable for Earth Fault detection on DAP AEnable/Disable for Earth Fault detection on DAP ASwitch for 2-wire/4-wire FFT riser

Adjustment of the correct audio level for the amplifier shall not require any special tools ortest equipment.

Includes audio input and amplified output supervision, back up input, and automaticswitch over function, (if primary amplifier should fail).

System shall be capable of backing up digital amplifiers.

23.0 Audio Message Generator (Prerecorded Voice)/Speaker Control:

Each initiating zone or intelligent device shall interface with an emergency voicecommunication system capable of transmitting a prerecorded voice message to allspeakers in the building.

Actuation of any alarm initiating device shall cause a prerecorded message to sound overthe speakers. The message shall be repeated four (4) times. Pre- and post-messagetones shall be supported.

A built-in microphone shall be provided to allow paging through speaker circuits.

24.0 Speakers:

All speakers shall operate on 70 VRMS or with field selectable output taps from 0.5 to 2.0Watts.


112

Speakers in corridors and public spaces shall produce a nominal sound output of 84 dBAat 10 feet (3m).

Frequency response shall be a minimum of 400 HZ to 4000 HZ.

The back of each speaker shall be sealed to protect the speaker cone from damage anddust.

25.0 System paging from emergency telephone circuits shall be supported.

The audio message generator shall have the following indicators and controls to allow forproper operator understanding and control:

LED Indicators:Lamp TestTroubleOff-Line TroubleMicrophone TroublePhone TroubleBusy/WaitPage InhibitedPre/Post Announcement Tone

Controls with associated LED Indicators:Speaker Switches/Indicators

The speaker circuit control switches/indicators shall include visual indication of active andtrouble status for each speaker circuit in the system.

The speaker circuit control panel shall include switches to manually activate or deactivateeach speaker circuit in the system.

26.0 Fire Fighters Telephone System

The emergency telephone circuit control panel shall include visual indication of active andtrouble status for each telephone circuit in the system.

The telephone circuit control panel shall include switches to manually activate ordeactivate each telephone circuit in the system.

27.0 Waterflow OperationAn alarm from a waterflow detection device shall activate the appropriate alarm messageon the main panel display, turn on all programmed notification appliance circuits and shallnot be affected by the signal silence switch.

27.1 Supervisory Operation

An alarm from a supervisory device shall cause the appropriate indication on the systemdisplay, light a common supervisory LED, but will not cause the system to enter thetrouble mode.

27.2 Signal Silence Operation

The FACP shall have the ability to program each output circuit (notification, relay,speaker etc) to deactivate upon depression of the signal silence switch.

28.0 Sprinkler and Standpipe Valve Supervisory Switches:


113

Each sprinkler system water supply control valve riser, zone control valve, and standpipesystem riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hosevalves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches.PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valves shall be equipped with a supervisoryswitch.The switch shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valveand adjusted to operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valvecontrol, or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from itsnormal position.The supervisory switch shall be contained in a weatherproof aluminum housing, whichshall provide a 3/4 inch (19 mm) conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilitiesfor attachment to the valves.The switch housing shall be finished in red baked enamel.The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause a switchoperation if the housing cover is removed, or if the unit is removed from its mounting.Valve supervisory switches shall be provided and connected under this section andinstalled by mechanical contractor.

29.0 Non-Alarm Input Operation

Any addressable initiating device in the system may be used as a non-alarm input tomonitor normally open contact type devices. Non-alarm functions are a lower priority thanfire alarm initiating devices.Combo ZoneA special type code shall be available to allow waterflow and supervisory devices toshare a common addressable module. Waterflow devices shall be wired in parallel,supervisory devices in series.

30.0 SYSTEM COMPONENTS:

30.1 Printer

The printer shall provide hard-copy printout of all changes in status of the system andshall time-stamp such printouts with the current time-of-day and date. The printer shall bestandard carriage with 80-characters per line and shall use standard pin-feed paper. Theprinter shall be enclosed in a separate cabinet suitable for placement on a desktop ortable. The printer shall communicate with the control panel using an interface complyingwith Electrical Industries Association standard EIA-232D. Power to the printer shall be120 VAC @ 60 Hz.The system shall have a strip printer capable of being mounted directly in the main FACPenclosure. Alarms shall be printed in easy-to-read RED, other messages, such as atrouble, shall be printed in BLACK. This printer shall receive power from the systempower supply and shall operate via battery back-up if AC mains are lost. The strip printershall be UL 864 listed.

30.2 Video Display Terminal

The Video Display Terminal shall provide a visual display and an audible alert of allchanges in status of the system and shall annotate such displays with the current time-of-day and date.The Video Display Terminal shall be enclosed in a cabinet suitable for placement on adesktop or table.A detachable keyboard shall be provided that may be used for programming, testing, andcontrol of the system. Individual keys shall be provided on the keyboard for theACKNOWLEDGE, RESET, LAMP TEST, SYSTEM TEST, and SIGNAL SILENCEfunctions of the control panel.The video display terminal shall include a count of all alarms and troubles in the system,as well as a count of all alarms and trouble requiring acknowledgment. These countsshall be continuously displayed during all FACP operations.

31.0 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICES


114

Addressable Devices - GeneralAddressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade, decimal addressswitches. Devices shall be capable of being set to an address in a range of 001 to 159.Addressable devices, which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as a DIP-switch, are not an allowable substitute.Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wiresto the fire alarm control panel Signaling Line Circuits.Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/pollingLEDs. Both LEDs shall flash green under normal conditions, indicating that the detector isoperational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall beplaced into steady red illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm conditionhas been detected. If required, the LED flash shall have the ability to be removed fromthe system program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connectan external remote alarm LED.The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment through fieldprogramming of the system. The panel on a time-of-day basis shall automatically adjustsensitivity.Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dustaccumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance.The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirementsof NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7.The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base withtamper proof feature. Bases shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local) sounderrated at 85 DBA minimum, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 7applications.

The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm conditionand report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detectoritself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the controlpanel.Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall useto identify the type of device .Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures itsdesigned environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based onreal-time measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make thealarm/normal decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in theFACP program and allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of eachdetector.Addressable devices shall store an internal identifying code that the control panel shalluse to identify the type of device.A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shallreport an indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the alarm threshold.Addressable modules shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54mm) deep electrical box. An optional surface mount Lexan enclosure shall be available.

32.0 Programmable Electronic Exit Point Directional Sounders:

Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal.Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, at asound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device.Shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on plans.Shall produce broad band directional sound to guide occupants to safe exists even incomplete darkness.Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA, UL Standard 1971, be fullysynchronized, and shall meet the following criteria:The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second.Strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971.The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971.Field Wiring Terminal BlocksFor ease of service all panel I/O wiring terminal blocks shall be removable, plug-in typesand have sufficient capacity for #18 to #12 AWG wire. Terminal blocks that arepermanently fixed are not acceptable.


115

33.0 Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Box (manual station)

Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, senddata to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressablecommunication module status. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall bedesigned so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normaluse except by the use of a key.

All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a keytype reset.

Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operatinginstructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of thestations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger.

34.0 Intelligent Multi-Co-Operative Sensing type Photoelectric Smoke Detector

The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smokedensity and shall be in position to work in advance multi Co-Operative Sensing, oncommand from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level ofsmoke density.

35.0 Intelligent Thermal Detectors

Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degreesFahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F(9.4 degrees C) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panelsignaling line circuit.

36.0 Intelligent Laser Photo Smoke Detector

36.1 The intelligent laser photo smoke detector shall be a spot type detector that incorporatesan extremely bright laser diode and an integral lens that focuses the light beam to a verysmall volume near a receiving photo sensor. The scattering of smoke particles shallactivate the photo sensor.

36.2. The laser detector shall have conductive plastic so that dust accumulation is reducedsignificantly.

36.3. The intelligent laser photo detector shall have nine sensitivity levels and be sensitive to aminimum obscuration of 0.03 percent per foot.

36.4. The laser detector shall not require expensive conduit, special fittings or PVC pipe.

36.5. The intelligent laser photo detector shall support standard, relay, isolator and sounderdetector bases.

36.6. The laser photo detector shall not require other cleaning requirements than those listed inNFPA 72. Replacement, refurbishment or specialized cleaning of the detector head shallnot be required.

36.7. The laser photo detector shall include two bicolor LEDs that flash green in normaloperation and turn on steady red in alarm.


116

37.0 Intelligent Multi Criteria Acclimating Detector

37.1 The intelligent multi criteria Acclimate detector shall be an addressable device that isdesigned to monitor a minimum of photoelectric and thermal technologies in a singlesensing device. The design shall include the ability to adapt to its environment byutilizing a built-in microprocessor to determine it's environment and choose theappropriate sensing settings. The detector design shall allow a wide sensitivity window,no less than 1 to 4% per foot obscuration. This detector shall utilize advancedelectronics that react to slow smoldering fires and thermal properties all within a singlesensing device.

37.2 The microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity levelsbased on the environment type it is in (office, manufacturing, kitchen etc.) and then havethe ability to automatically change the setting as the environment changes (as walls aremoved or as the occupancy changes).

37.3 The intelligent multi criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signalof the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric signal in an effort to react hastilyin the event of a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguishbetween a fire condition and a false alarm condition by examining the characteristics ofthe thermal and smoke sensing chambers and comparing them to a database of actualfire and deceptive phenomena.

38.0 Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector

38.1 The smoke detector housing shall accommodate either an intelligent ionization detectoror an intelligent photoelectric detector, of that provides continuous analog monitoring andalarm verification from the panel.

38.2 When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, andappropriate action taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the rapiddistribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the ductsystem.

39.0 Hostile-Area Smoke Detector

39.1 The detector shall be designed to provide early warning smoke detection in environmentswhere traditional smoke detectors are not practical.

39.2 The detector shall have a filter system to remove particles down to 25 microns.

39.3 This filter system shall remove unwanted airborne particles and water mist. This shallallow the detector to operate in environments where traditional smoke detectors wouldhave nuisance alarms.

39.4 The filter system shall consist of 2 filters one of which is field replaceable.

39.5 The filter system shall have an intake fan to draw air and smoke through the filters intothe sensing chamber.

39.6 The filter system shall be supervised so that if the filter is clogged or the fan fails thecontrol panel reports trouble.

39.7 The filter system shall be powered from 24 VDC separate from the SLC communications.

39.8 The detector shall utilize a photoelectric sensing chamber.

40.0 Two Wire Detector Monitor Module


117

40.1 Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone ofconventional 2-wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contactdevice).

40.2 The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An LED shallbe provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module isoperational and in regular communication with the control panel.

41.0 Addressable Control Module

41.1 Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation ofone conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio/visualnotification appliances.

41.2. The control module NAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with up to 1 ampof inductive A/V signal, or 2 amps of resistive A/V signal operation.

41.3. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power circuit from themain fire alarm control panel or from a supervised UL listed remote power supply.

41.4. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a minimum of0.6 amps at 30 VDC.

42.0 Addressable Relay Module

42.1 Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other buildingfunctions. The relay shall be form C and rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps resistive or 1.0Amps inductive. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connectionrequirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized atthe same time on the same pair of wires.

43.0 Isolator Module

43.1 Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits onan SLC Class A or Class B branch. The isolator module shall limit the number of modulesor detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC loopsegment or branch. At least one isolator module shall be provided for each floor orprotected zone of the building.

43.2 If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open-circuit(disconnect) the SLC. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator moduleshall automatically reconnect the isolated section.

43.3 The isolator module shall not require address-setting, and its operations shall be totallyautomatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its normaloperation.

43.4 The isolator module shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that the isolatoris operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition hasbeen detected and isolated.

44.0 BATTERIES:

The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less thantwenty-four hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure.

The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid levelchecks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required.


118

If necessary to meet standby requirements, external battery and charger systems may beused.

45.0 EXECUTION

45.1 INSTALLATION:

Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, asshown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finishedareas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installedprior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during thisperiod, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination andphysical damage.All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shallbe flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted whenlocated in unfinished areas.Manual fire alarm boxes shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush mounting asshown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor morethan 48 inches (122 mm) above the finished floor.

45.2 TEST:

The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by themanufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise andparticipate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be inaccordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7.Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for shortcircuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.Verify activation of all waterflow switches.Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using thewalk test.

Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introducedon the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at theFACP and the correct activation of the control points.When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual shall beconsulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address suchitems as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices,sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.

45.3 FINAL INSPECTION:

At the final inspection, a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer of the majorequipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect.

46.0 INSTRUCTION:

Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-ondemonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire systemincluding program changes and functions shall be provided.


119

The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide atypewritten "Sequence of Operation."

TECHINAL SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL WORKS

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 Ambient air temperature shall be taken as 50 deg. C for the purpose of designingof electrical equipment.

1.2 This specification shall be read and constructed in conjunction with the drawings andannexure to determine the scope of work.

1.3 All equipment shall be capable of continuous operation satisfactorily under the followingconditions:a) voltage variation : ± 10%b) frequency variation : ± 5%c) combined voltage & frequency variation : ± 10%


120

1.4 Nominal system supply available shall be as follows:a) Incoming : 11 kV, 3 Ph., 50 Hz, with fault level of 350 MVA.

b) Distribution : 415V, 3 Ph., 4 wire, 50 Hz with fault level of 35 kA.

2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS

2.1 All equipment and materials specified herein or not, shall be designed, manufactured andtested with the latest applicable standards & bureau of Indian standards.

2.2 All electrical equipment shall also conform to the latest electricity rules as regards safetyand other essential provisions.

2.3 All electrical installation work shall comply with the requirements of the following Act /rules / codes as amended up to date:a) Indian electricity act.b) Indian electricity rules.c) National electric code published by BIS.d) All relevant Is codes of practice.e) Regulations published by tariff advisory committee.

3.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3.1 GENERAL

a) One independent radial feeder is envisaged from State Electricity Board forreceiving incoming supply on 11 kV.

b) 11 KV incoming supply shall be connected to Metering Panel through 11 kV XLPEcable.

c) 11 kV XLPE cable shall be buried in ground

d) 11 KV Panel shall have each outgoing shall feed power to the Transformer.

e) 415V L T panel shall receive power from Distribution Transformer I DGsynchronization panel and shall feed power to various Blocks & Common Servicesas per enclosed single line diagram.

f) There shall be different metering for State Electricity supply and for DG powersupply through the same energy meter. For this purpose, a control cable shall runfrom substation to different energy meters.

g) Further routing of cables and Power Distribution shall be as per Single LineDiagram.

4.0 DESIGN CRITERIA

4.1 GENERAL

a) The equipment shall be used in high voltage system having characteristics as listedin this specification.

b) The equipment shall be installed in a hot, dusty, humid and tropical atmosphere.


121

c) There shall be no radio interference when the equipment are operated at maximumservice voltage.

d) The max. temp. in any part of the equipment at specified rating shall not exceedthe permissible limits as stipulated in the relevant standards.

e) The equipment shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and thermal stressesof listed short circuit current without any damage or deterioration.

f) All equipment, accessories and wiring shall have tropical protection, involvingspecial treatment of metal and insulation against fungus, insects and corrosion.

g) The safety clearances of all live parts of the equipment shall be as per relevantstandards.

h) All equipment/components of identical rating shall be physically and electricallyinterchangeable.

i) All outdoor equipment shall be suitable to mount on steel structure. Connectorsshall be bimetallic conductor.

j) Wherever single core cables are terminated in any equipment, gland plate shall beof Aluminium (3-4 mm thick).

k) There shall be no straight through joints in power & control cables.

l) All cable terminations shall be with Double compression cable gland with armourholding system.

m) The lighting fixture shall have loop in & loop out facility.

GENERAL & TECHNICAL

1 POINT WIRING :-

1.1. DEFINITION :-

A point (other than socket outlet point shall include all work necessary in complete wiringto the various outlets from the controlling switch or MCB.

1.2. SCOPE :-

Following shall be deemed to included in point wiring.

i. Conduit/casing and capping/channels as the case may be, accessories for thesame and wiring cables between the switch box and the point outlet, loopprotective earthing of each fan / light fixture.

ii. All fixing accessories such as clips, nails, screws, Phil plug, rawl plug etc asrequired.

iii. Metal / PVC switch boxes for control switches, regulators, sockets etc, recessedor surface type of modular type or piano type with sheet as required and asmentioned in BOQ.


122

iv. Outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull-through boxes etc, but excluding metal boxes ifany, provided with switchboards for loose wires/conduit terminations.

v. Any special block required for neatly housing the connector.

vi. Control switch or MCB, as specified in BOQ / drawings.

vii. 3 / 5 pin or 6 pin socket, ceiling rose or connector as required.

viii. Connections to ceiling rose, connector, socket outlet, lamp holder, switch etc.

xi. Bushes conduit or porcelain tubing where wiring cables pass through wall etc.

1.3 MATERIAL :-

i The system of wiring shall consist of ISI marked single core, PVC insulated,FRLS, 1100 volt grade, stranded, flexible copper conductor wires as per IS :694 amended up to date.

ii The Conduit and accessories shall be of mild steel of ISI marked (IS:9537)ERW black, stove enameled, screwed type. The wall thickness of conduitsshall be 16 SWG for 20, 25 and 32 mm dia conduits and 14 SWG for 40 and50 mm dia conduits.

1.4. CONDUCTOR SIZE :-

Wiring shall be carried out with following sizes of wires –

a. Light/fan/call bell/ exhaust fan point - 1.5 sq mm.

b. 5 amp plug points - 1.5 sq mm..

c. Light circuit - 1.5 sq mm.

d. 5 amp plug points for computers - 2.5 / 1.5 sq mm.

e. General / Primary Power point - 4.0 sq mm.

f. Secondary Power point - 2.5 sq mm.

g. Power point for AC - 4.0 / 6.0 sq mm.

1.5 Size of Earth wires shall be as per following table -

Size of point/ circuit / submain wires Earth wire

2x1.5 sqmm. - 1x1.0 / 1.5 sqmm.

2x2.5 sqmm. - 1x1.5 sqmm.

2x4 sqmm. - 1x2.5 sqmm.


123

2x6 sqmm. - 1x4 sqmm.






2. MEASUREMENT :-

2.1. POINT WIRING :-

i. Unless and otherwise specified, there shall be no linear measurement for pointwiring for light points, fan points, exhaust fan points and call bell points. Theseshall be measured on unit basis by counting.

ii. No separate measurement will be made for interconnections between points inthe same distribution circuit and for the circuit protective (loop earthing)conductors between metallic switch boxes.

2.2 POINT WIRING FOR SOCKET OUTLET POINTS :-

i. The light plug (5A/6A) point and power (5A/15A) point shall be measured on unitbasis by counting. The submain / circuit wiring to socket outlets is included in theitem, from the respective tapping point of live cable, namely switch box, anothersocket outlet point, or the sub distribution board as the case may be, up to thesocket outlet.

ii. The metal box with cover, switch/MCB socket outlet and other accessories shallalso be included in the above item.

2.3 GROUP CONTROL POINTS WIRING :-

i. In the case of points with more than one point controlled by the same switch,such point shall be measured in parts i.e.(a) from the switch to the first pointoutlet as one point (Primary point), and (b) for the subsequent points each shallbe treated as separate point (additional/secondary).

ii. No recovery shall be made for non-provision of more than one switch in suchcases.

2.4 TWIN CONTROL LIGHT POINT WIRING :-

i. A light point controlled by two numbers of two way switches shall be measuredas two point.

ii. No recovery shall be made for non-provision of more than one ceiling rose /connector in such cases.


124

2.5 MULTIPLE CONTROLLED CALL BELL POINTS WIRING :-

g. In the case of call bell points with a single call bell outlet, controlled from morethan one place, the point shall be measured in parts i.e. (a) from the call belloutlet to one of the nearest ceiling roses meant for connection to bell push,treated as one point and (b) from that ceiling rose to the next one and so on,shall be treated as separate point(s).

ii. No recovery shall be made for non-provision of more than one ceiling rose orconnector for connection to call bell in such cases.

3. CIRCUIT AND SUBMAIN WIRING :-

3.1. CIRCUIT WIRING :-

Circuit wiring shall mean the wiring from the distribution board up to the first tapping pointinside the switch board.

3.2. SUB MAIN WIRING :-

Sub main wiring shall mean the wiring from one main/distribution switchboard to anotherboard / panel and from Distribution Board to Power Outlet / AC Outlet.

4. MEASUREMENT OF SUBMAIN / CIRCUIT WIRING :-

i. Sub main wiring shall be measured on linear basis along the run of the wiring. Themeasurement shall include all length from end to end of conduit or casing and cappingas the case may be, exclusive of interconnections inside the switch board etc. Theincrease on account of diversion or slackness shall not be included in the measurement.

ii. The length of circuit wiring shall be measured from the distribution board to the nearestswitch box from which the point wiring starts. Looping of switch box also will be countedtowards circuit wiring, measured along the length of conduit / channel.

5. SYSTEM OF DISTRIBUTION AND WIRINGS :-

i. Main distribution board shall be controlled by the circuit breaker. Each outgoingcircuit shall be controlled by a circuit breaker on the phase or live conductor.

ii. The branch distribution board shall be controlled by a circuit breaker. Eachoutgoing circuit shall be provided with a MCB of specified rating on the phase orlive conductor.

iii. The load of the circuits shall be divided, as far as possible, evenly between thenumber of ways of the distribution boards, leaving at least one spare circuit forfuture extension.

iv. The neutral conductors (incoming and outgoing) shall be connected to a commonlink (multi way connector) in the distribution board and be capable of beingdisconnected individually for testing purposes.

i. Wiring shall be separate for essential loads (ie those fed through stand bysupply) and non-essential loads throughout.

6. BALANCING OF CIRCUITS :-


125

The balancing of circuits in three wire or poly phase installations shall be arranged up tothe satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

7. WIRING SYSTEM :-

a) the wiring shall be done only by the “Looping system”. Phase or live conductors shallbe looped at the switch boxes. For point wiring neutral / earth wire looping for the firstpoint shall be done in the switch box, and neutral / earth looping of subsequent pointwill be made from point outlet.

b) Lights, fans and call bells shall be wired in the ‘lighting’ circuits. 15A/16A socketoutlets and other power outlets shall be wired in the ‘Power’ circuits. 5A/6A socketoutlets shall also be wired in the “Lighting” circuit unless mentioned otherwise.

c) The wiring throughout the installation shall be such that there is no break in theneutral wire except in the form of a linked switch gear.

d) Surface wiring shall run, as far as possible, along the walls and ceiling so as to beeasily accessible for inspection.

e) In all types of wiring, due consideration shall be given for neatness, good appearanceand safety.

f) Colour coding :

Phase : Red / Yellow / Blue (three phase wiring)

Live : Red (single phase wiring)

Neutral : Black

Earth : Green

8. PASSING THROUGH WALLS OR FLOORS :-

i. When wiring cables are to pass through a wall, these shall be taken through aprotection (steel/PVC) pipe or porcelain tube of suitable size such that they passthrough in a straight line without twist or cross in them on either end of suchholes. The ends of metallic pipe shall be neatly bushed with porcelain, PVC orother approved material.

ii. Where a wall pipe passes outside a building so as to be exposed to weather, theouter end shall be bell mouthed and turned downwards and properly bushed onthe open end.

iii. All floor openings for carrying any wiring shall be suitably sealed after installation.

9. JOINTS IN WIRING :-

i. No bare conductor in phase and/or neutral or twisted joints in phase, neutral,and/or protective conductors in wiring shall be permitted.

ii. There shall be no joints in the through-runs of cables. If the length of final circuitor sub main is more than the length of a standard coil, thus necessitating athrough joint, such joints shall be made by means of approved mechanicalconnectors in suitable junction boxes.


126

iv. Termination of multi stranded conductors shall be done using suitable crimpingtype thimbles.

10. CONFORMITY TO I.E. ACT, I.E. RULES AND STANDARDS :-

i. All electrical works shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of theIndian Electricity Act, 1910 and Indian Electricity Rules 1956 amended up todate.

ii. The work shall also conform to relevant Indian Standard codes of practice for thetype of work involved.

iii. In all electrical installation works, relevant safety codes of practice shall befollowed.

iv. The complete wiring installation shall confirm to IS : 732 amended up to date.

11. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF COMPONENTS :-

11.1 QUALITY OF MATERIALS :-

All materials and equipment supplied by the contractor shall be new. They shall be ofsuch design, size and material as to satisfactorily function under the rated conditions ofoperation and to with stand the environmental conditions at site.

11.2 RATING OF COMPONENTS :-

i. All components in a wiring installation shall be of appropriate ratings of voltage,current and frequency, as required at the respective sections of the electricalinstallation in which they are used.

ii. All conductors, switches and accessories shall be of such size as to be capableof carrying the maximum current which will normally flow through them, withouttheir respective ratings being exceeded.

11.3 CONFORMITY OF STANDARDS :-

All components shall conform to relevant Indian Standard specification, whereverexisting. Materials with ISI certification mark shall be preferred. However for conduits,wiring cables, piano/tumbler switches and socket outlets, ISI marked materials shall onlybe permitted.

11.4 INTERCHANGEABILITY :-

Similar parts of all switches, lamp holders, distribution fuse boards, switch gears, ceilingroses, brackets, pendants, fans and all other fittings of the same type shall beinterchangeable in each installation.

SWITCHES & RECEPTACLES (Piano Type)


127

1. CONTROL SWITCHES FOR POINTS :-

i. The switch box or regulator box shall be hot dipped galvanized, factoryfabricated. The wall thickness shall not be less than 1.2 mm (18 gauge) for boxesup to a size of 20 cm x 30 cm, and above this size 1.6 mm (16 gauge) thickboxes shall be used. The metallic boxes shall be duly painted with anticorrosivepaint before erection.

ii. Where a large number of control switches and/or fan regulators are required tobe installed at one place, these shall be installed in more than one outlet boxadjacent to each other for ease of maintenance.

iii. An earth terminal with stud & 2 metal washers shall be provided in each box fortermination of protective conductors and for connection to socket outlet/metallicbody of fan regulator etc.

iv. Clear depth of the box shall not be less than 50 mm, and this shall be increasedsuitably to accommodate mounting of fan regulators in flush pattern.

v. The fan regulators can also be mounted on the switch box covers, if so directedby the Engineer-in-charge.

vi. Control switches (single pole switches) carrying not more than 16 A shall be ofpiano type, as specified, and the switch shall be "ON" when the nob is down.

vii. Only MCB' s shall be used for controlling industrial type socket outlets.

viii. Control switch shall be placed only in the live conductor of the circuit. No singlepole switch or fuse shall be inserted in the protective (earth) conductor, orearthed neutral conductor of the circuit.

ix. All switches, regulators, outlets & other accessories shall be white colour withmatching white cover plate. In no case ivory or off white switches shall beaccepted.

x. All switches shall be as per IS 3854 amended up to date.


128

2. SOCKET OUTLETS :-

i. Socket outlet shall be of the same type, white piano type as their controlswitches. These shall be rated either for 5A/6A or 15A/16A. Combined 5A/15A or6A/16A six pin socket outlet shall be provided in `power' circuits.

ii. In an earthed system of supply, socket outlets and plugs shall only be of 3 pintype, the third pin shall be connected to earth through protective (loop earthing)conductor. 2 pin or 5 pin sockets shall not be permitted to be used.

iii. Every socket outlets shall be controlled by a switch or MCB, as specified. Thecontrol switch/MCB shall be connected on the `live' side of the line.

iv. Outlet boxes for socket outlets (both15A/16A and 5A/6A) points shall be of size175 mm x 100mm.

v. Unless and other wise specified, the control switches for the 5A/6A and 15A/16Asocket outlets shall be kept along with the socket outlets.

xi. All sockets shall be as per IS 1293 amended up to date.

3. SWITCH BOX COVERS :-

Phenolic laminated sheets of approved white shade (same as switches and sockets)shall be used for switch box covers. These shall be of white 3 mm thick syntheticphenolic resin bonded laminated sheet as base material and conforming to grade P-I ofIS:2036-1974, Secured to the box with counter sunk C.P. Brass Screws. The corners ofcover plates shall be at right angle.


129

SWITCHES & BOXES (Modular Type)

i. The switch box or regulator box shall be made of metal on all sides, except onthe front. The boxes shall be used of the same make and model as of modularswitches. In no case the locally manufactured switch boxes will be accepted. Thesize of box shall be governed by the number of switches/outlets/regulators on therespective board. The boxes shall be with zinc plating and yellow passivation tocomplies with the rust test as per IS 3854. The boxes should have slotted holesfor level adjustments. The boxes shall be fitted with riveted brass earth terminalsfor earth connections.

ii. Clear depth of the box shall not in a range of 50 mm to 65 mm depending uponthe size of board and manufacturer.

iii Control switch shall be placed only in the live conductor of the circuit. No singlepole switch or fuse shall be inserted in the protective (earth) conductor, orearthed neutral conductor of the circuit. The switches shall be provided with silvercontacts. The neutral should make first and breaks last.

iv. Socket outlet shall be rated either for 5A/6A or 15A/16A. 5/6 Amp sockets shallbe of 5 pin type with shutters. Combined 5A/15A or 6A/16A six pin shutteredsocket outlet shall be provided in `power' circuits. The earth pin shall beconnected to earth through protective (loop earthing) conductor. All sockets shallbe provided with safety shutters to allow easy entry of two pin plugs without theneed to force the earth terminal by unsafe means. All sockets shall confirm toIS:1293.

v. Every socket outlet shall be controlled by a switch, as specified. The controlswitch shall be connected on the `live' side of the line.

Vi The switches and sockets shall be manufactured using engineering plastic tomake it fire retardant and highly resistant to impact.

vii. The fan speed regulators shall be of electronic and stepped type

viii. The RJ-45 data socket shall be suitable for cat5/cat 6 data cables.

ix. Gold plated contacts shall be provided in all communication jacks to enhancedata and voice transmission.


130

SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR

1. GENERAL ASPECTS :-

i. All items of switchgear and distribution boards (DB' s) shall be metal clad type.

ii. The types, rating and/or categories of switch gear and protective gear shall be asspecified in the tender schedule of work.

iii. RCCB’s and RCBO’s where specified, shall conform to the requirements ofcurrent rating, fault rating, single phase or three phase configuration andsensitivity laid down in the tender documents.

iv. While each outgoing way of distribution board (D.B.) shall be of miniature circuitbreaker (MCB) as specified, and of suitable rating on the phase conductor, thecorresponding earthed neutral conductor shall be connected to a commonneutral terminal block and shall be capable of being disconnected individually fortesting purpose.

v. Independent earth terminal block.

Every distribution board (single phase as well as three phase) shall have anearth terminal block identical to, but independent from neutral terminal block, toenable termination of protective (loop earthing) conductors (incoming as well asout goings) individually by screwed connection and without twisting.

vi. Earthing terminal (1 for single phase and 2 for three phase) shall be provided onthe metal cladding of switches and D.B.' s for body earthing. These shall besuitably marked.

vii. Knock out holes, with or without end plates as per standard design ofmanufacturers, shall be provided in the metal cladding of switches and D.B.’ s fortermination of conduits/cables.

viii. Each distribution board shall be provided with a circuit list giving details of eachcircuit which it controls and the current rating of the circuit, and the size of thefuse element.

2. MCB TYPE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (MCB DB) :-

i. MCB DB' s may be of single phase, three phase (horizontal type) suitable forfeeding single phase loads or 3 phase (vertical type) suitable for feeding singlephase as well as three phase loads, each phase isolation type three phase DB inwhich each phase can be isolated by a separate circuit breaker or RCCB, asspecified. These shall be complete with accessories, but without MCB’ s, whichshall be specified as a separate item in the tender documents.

ii. The current ratings and the number of ways shall be as specified. Blanking platesshall be provided to close unused ways. These shall be indicated as a separateitem in the Schedule of work.

iii. MCB DB' s shall be of surface/flush mounting pattern according to therequirement of their location, and shall be suitable to accommodate MCB' s andMCB type isolators and RCCB (ELCB) at incoming in single pole or multi poleconfiguration, as required.


131

ii. MCB DB's shall be double door type, dust and vermin proof conforming to IP 43or as per BOQ, and shall be fabricated out of CRCA sheet steel, minimum 1.2mm thick, with stove enameled paint finish.

v. In case of Concealed / Recessed D.B.’s, the DB should have metallic collar forzero error installation, however, cutting of brick work, providing suitable lintel,making good the wall including plastering etc. with necessary civil work includingall Civil material shall be included in contractor’s scope for proper completion ofwork.

vi. MCB DB' s shall have removal type end plates with knock-outs at the bottom andtop, and shall have hinged covers with locking arrangement.

vii. Only the knobs of the MCB' s shall protrude out of the front covers throughopenings neatly machine made for the purpose.

viii. The bus bars used shall be solid electrolytic copper of appropriate sections.

ix. Din bar(s) shall be provided for mounting the MCB' s.

x. The complete board shall be factory fabricated and shall be duly pre-wired in theworks, ready for installation at site.

xi. The board shall be fully pre wired with single core PVC insulated copperconductors/insulated solid copper links, and terminated on to extended typeterminal connectors, suitable for connections to the sizes of the respectiveconductors.

xii. All incoming and outgoing wiring to the pre wired MCBDB' s shall be terminatedonly in the extended terminal connectors to be provided within the DB. Theterminal connectors shall therefore be so provided as to facilitate easy cableconnections and subsequent maintenance.

3. MCCB TYPE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (MCCB DB) :-

i. All MCCB DB' s shall be of three phase suitable for feeding single phase loads or3 phase loads through SP/TP MCB’s, IP 43 enclosure, sheet steel, double doorwith tinned copper bus bar, neutral bar, earth bar, knock outs etc. The DB’s shallbe original factory fabricated of approved make.

ii. The current ratings of Incomer MCCB shall be upto 250 amp and the number ofways shall be as specified. Blanking plates shall be provided to close unusedways.

iii. MCCB DB shall be of surface/flush mounting pattern according to therequirement of their location, and shall be suitable to accommodate Four poleMCCB at incomer and SP/TP MCB’s at outgoings, as required.

iii. MCCB DB's shall be dust and vermin proof conforming to IP 43, and shall befabricated out of CRCA sheet steel, minimum 1.3 mm thick, with stove enameledpaint finish.

v. In case of Concealed / Recessed D.B.’s, the DB should have metallic collar forzero error installation, however, cutting of brick work, providing suitable lintel,making good the wall including plastering etc. with necessary civil work includingall Civil material shall be included in contractor’s scope for proper completion ofwork.


132

vi. MCCB DB' s shall have removal type end plates with knock-outs at the bottomand top, and shall have hinged covers with locking arrangement.

viii. The bus bars used shall be solid electrolytic copper of appropriate sections.

ix. Din bar(s) shall be provided for mounting the MCB' s.

4. WORKMANSHIP :-

i. Good workmanship is an essential requirement to be complied with. The entirework of manufacture/fabrication, assembly and installation shall conform tosound engineering practice.

ii. The work shall be carried out under the direct supervision of a first class licensedforeman, or of a person holding a certificate of competency issued by the stateGovernment for the type of work involved, employed by the contractor, who shallrectify then and there the defects pointed out by the Engineer-in-charge duringthe progress of work.

5. COMMISSIONING ON COMPLETION :-

Before the workman leaves the work finally, he must make sure that the installation is incommission, after due testing.

6. COMPLETION PLAN AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE :-

i. For all works completion certificate after completion of work shall be submitted tothe Engineer-in-charge.

ii. Completion plan drawn to a suitable scale in tracing cloth with ink indicating thefollowing, along with three blue print copies of the same shall also be submitted.

a) General layout of the building.

b) Locations of main switch board and distribution boards, indicating the circuitnumbers controlled by them.

c) Position of all points and their controls.

d) Types of fittings, viz. fluorescent, pendants, brackets, bulkhead, fans andexhaust fans etc.

e) Name of work, job number, accepted tender reference, actual date of completion,names of Division/Sub-Division and name of the firm who executed the work withtheir signature.

7. ADDITION TO AN INSTALLATION :-

An addition, temporary or permanent, shall not be made to the authorised load of anexisting installation until it has been definitely ascertained that the current carryingcapacity and the condition of the existing accessories, conductors, switches etc affected,including those of the supply Authorities, are adequate for the increased load.


133


134

PVC CONDUIT WIRING SYSTEM

1. SCOPE :-

This chapter covers the detailed requirements for wiring work in non-metallic conduits.This chapter covers both surface and recessed types of wiring work.

2. APPLICATION :-

1. Recessed conduit work is generally suitable for all applications. Surface conduitwork may be adopted in places like workshops etc. and where recessed workmay not be possible to be done. The type of work shall be as specified inindividual works.

2. Flexible non-metallic conduits shall be used only at terminations, whereverspecified.

3. Special precautions :-

i. If the pipes are liable to mechanical damages, they should be adequatelyprotected.

ii. Non-metallic conduit shall not be used for the following applications :-

a) In concealed/ inaccessible places of combustible construction where ambienttemperature exceeds 60oC.

b) In places where ambient temperature is less than 5oC.

c) For suspension of fluorescent fittings and other fixtures.

d) In areas exposed to sunlight.

3. MATERIAL :-

3.1 CONDUITS :-

i. All non-metallic conduit pipes and accessories shall be of suitable materialcomplying with IS : 2509-1973 and IS : 3419-1988. for rigid conduits and IS :9537(V)-2000 for flexible conduits. The interior of the conduits shall be free fromobstructions. The rigid conduit pipes shall be ISI marked.

ii. The conduit shall be circular in cross-section. The conduit shall be designated bytheir nominal outside diameter. The dimensional details of rigid non-metallicconduits are given in Table-1a.

iii. No non-metallic conduit less than 20 mm in diameter shall be used.


135

iv. WIRING CAPACITY :-

The maximum number of PVC insulated aluminium/copper conductor cables of650/1100 V grade conforming to IS : 694-1990 that can be drawn in one conduitof various sizes is given in table-2a. Conduit sizes shall be selectedaccordingly.

3.2 CONDUIT ACCESSORIES :-

i. The conduit wiring system shall be complete in all respect including accessories.

ii. Rigid conduit accessories shall be normally of grip type.

iii. Flexible conduit accessories shall be of threaded type.

iv. Bends, couplers etc. shall be solid type in recessed type of works, and may besolid or inspection type as required, in surface type of works.

v. Saddles for fixing conduits shall be heavy gauge non-metallic type with base.

vi. The minimum width and the thickness of the ordinary clips or girder clips shall beas per Table-3a.

vii. For all sizes of conduit, the size of clamping rod shall be 4.5mm (7 SWG)diameter.

4. INSTALLATION :-

1. COMMON ASPECTS FOR BOTH RECESSED AND SURFACE CONDUIT WORKS.

i. The erection of conduits of each circuit shall be completed before the cables aredrawn in.

ii. CONDUIT JOINTS :-

a) All joints shall be sealed/cemented with an approved cement. Damagedconduit

pipes / fittings shall not be used in the work. Cut ends of conduit pipes shall haveno sharp edges nor any burrs left to avoid damage to the insulation of conductorswhile pulling them through such pipes.

b) The Engineer-in-charge, with a view to ensuring that the above provision hasbeen

Carried out, may require that the separate lengths of conduit etc. after they havebeen prepared, shall be submitted for inspection before being fixed.


136

iii. BENDS IN CONDUITS :-

a) All bends in the system may be formed either by bending the pipes byan

approved method of heating, or by inserting suitable accessories such as bends,elbows or similar fittings, or by fixing non-metallic inspection boxes, whichever ismost suitable. Where necessary, solid type fittings shall be used.

b) Radius of bends in conduit pipes shall not be less than 7.5 cm.

c) Care shall be taken while bending the pipes to ensure that the conduit pipe is notinjured, and that the internal diameter is not effectively reduced.

iv. PAINTING :-

After installation, all accessible surface of metallic accessories shall be painted.

5. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SURFACE CONDUIT WORK :-

i. Conduit pipe shall be fixed by heavy gauge non-metallic saddles with base,secured to suitable approved plugs with screws in an approved manner, at aninterval of not more than 60 cm, on either side of couplers or bends or similarfittings, saddles shall be fixed at a closer distance from the center of suchfittings. Slotted PVC saddles may also be used where the PVC pipe can bepushed in through the slots.

ii. Where the conduit pipes are to be laid along the trusses, steel joists etc. thesame shall be secured by means of saddles or girder clips as required by theEngineer-in-charge. Where it is not possible to use these for fixing, suitableclamps with bolts and nuts shall be used.

6. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RECESSED CONDUIT WORK :-

i. MAKING CHASE :-

a) chase in the wall shall be neatly made, and of ample dimensions to permit theconduit to be fixed in the manner desired.

b) In the case of buildings under construction, the conduits shall be buried in thewall

Before plastering, and shall be finished neatly after erection of conduit.

c) In case of exposed brick/rubble masonry work, special care shall be taken to fixthe conduit and accessories in position along with the building work.


137

ii. FIXING CONDUITS IN CHASE :-

a) The conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of staples, or by means of non-metallicsaddles, placed at not more than 60 cm apart, or shall be fixed by any otherapproved means of fixing.

b) At either side of the bends, saddles/staples shall be fixed at a distance of 15 cmfrom the center of the bends.

iii. ERECTION IN RCC WORK :-

a) The conduit pipes shall be laid in position and fixed to the steel reinforcementbars

by steel binding wires before the concreting is done. The conduit pipes shall befixed firmly to the steel reinforcement bars to avoid their dislocation duringpouring of cement concrete and subsequent tamping of the same.

b) Fixing of standard bends or elbows shall be avoided as far as practicable, and allCurves shall be maintained by bending the conduit pipe itself with a long radiuswhich will permit easy drawing of conductors.

c) Location of inspection/junction boxes in RCC work should be identified bysuitable

means to avoid unnecessary chipping of the RCC slab subsequently to locatethese boxes.

iv. FIXING INSPECTION BOXES :-

a) Suitable inspection boxes to the minimum requirement shall be provided topermit

inspection, and to facilitate replacement of wires, if necessary.

b) These shall be mounted flush with the wall or ceiling concrete. Minimum 65 mmDepth junction boxes shall be used in roof slabs.

c) Suitable ventilating holes shall be provided in the inspection box covers.

v. FIXING SWITCH BOXES AND ACCESSORIES :-

Switch boxes shall be mounted flush with the wall. All 137outlets such asswitches, socket outlets etc. shall be flush mounting type, unless otherwisespecified in the additional specification.

vi. FISH WIRE :-

To facilitate subsequent drawing of wires in the conduit, GI fish wire of 1.2 mm(18 SWG) shall be provided along with the laying of the recessed conduit.


138

7. BUNCHING OF CABLES :-

a) Cable carrying alternating current, installed in metal conduit, shall always bebunched so that the outgoing and return cables are drawn into the same conduit.

b) Where the distribution is for single phase loads only, conductors for these phasesshall be drawn in one conduit.

c) In case of three phase loads, separate conduits shall be run from the distributionboards to the load points, or outlets as the case may be.

8. EARTHING REQUIREMENTS :-

i. A protective (earth) conductor shall be drawn inside the conduit in all distributioncircuits to provide for earthing of non-current carrying metallic parts of theinstallation. These shall be terminated on the earth terminal in the switch boxes,and/or earth terminal blocks at the DB's.

ii. Protective conductors of large size which may not be possible to be carriedinside the conduits (as in the case of some sub mains etc.) may be laid externalto the conduits and clamped thereto suitably.

iii. Gas or water pipes shall not be used as protective conductors (Earth medium).


139

TABLE – 1a.

DIMENSIONAL DETAILS OF RIGID NON-METALLIC (PVC) CONDUITS.

(All dimensions in mm)

S.No. Nominal outsidediameter

( In mm )

Maximum outsidediameter

( In mm )

Minimum insidediameter

( In mm )

Maximumpermissibleeccentricity( In mm )

Maximumpermissible

ovality( In mm )

1. 20 20 +0.3 17.2 0.2 0.52. 25 25 +0.3 21.6 0.2 0.53. 32 32 +0.3 28.2 0.2 0.54. 40 40 +0.3 35.8 0.2 0.55. 50 50 +0.3 45.0 0.4 0.6

TABLE – 2a

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PVC INSULATED 650/ 1100 VOLT GRADE COPPER CONDUCTOR CABLE THAT CANBE DRAWN INTO RIGID PVC CONDUIT.

Nominal cross sectional area ofconductor in Sqmm.

20mm

25mm

32mm

40mm

1.50 5 10 14 -2.50 5 8 12 -4.00 3 8 10 -6.00 2 5 8 -

10.00 - 3 5 616.00 - - 3 625.00 - - 2 4

Note :-

The above table shows the maximum capacity of conduits for a simultaneous drawing ofcables.

TABLE – 3a.

ORDINARY CLIPS OR GIRDER CLIPS.

S.No. Size of conduit Width Thickness

1. 20 mm & 25 mm 19 mm 20 SWG ( 0.9144 mm )2. 32 mm & above 25 mm 18 SWG ( 1.219 mm )


140

TRUNKING CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SCOPE

1. This chapter covers the requirements of mini trunking (casing wiring) andadaptable metallic or PVC trunking ("otherwise also called wire ways").

Adaptable trunking shall be used for power cables and data cables to run parallelin two different compartments with partition.

2. Mini Trunking is suitable for surface wiring work indoors where necessitated,either due to aesthetics or technical requirements, such as case of extension ofexisting wiring, avoidance of recessed wiring in RCC columns etc. PVC

insulated cables and / or other approved insulated cables to IS: 694-1990 shall be used in this type of work.

Wherever data cables are used for information outlets. Adaptable trunking shallbe used.

3. (i) This system using PVC trunking shall be adopted in residential buildings,or office building where there is a need of tidy wiring system.

(ii) PVC Trunking for distribution of Voice, Data and Power should be used forcable management and should accept RJ45 Data socket and Power socketor other wiring accessory like switches, indicators etc.

(iii) Trunking should be equipped with rail on its surface on which clip-onpartition can be clipped which should accept frames/plates for wiringdevices upto 6/8 modules.

(i) Trunking should have insulation rating of 5 mega Ohm. Trunking shouldhave the following fire resistance characteristics.

- Operating temperature between - 40 Deg to 60 Deg.

MATERIAL

1. The mini trunking and adaptable trunking shall be of the same material, viz.either PVC or anodized aluminium in extruded sections.

2. The mini trunking shall have a square or rectangular body. The trunking covershall be "CLIP-ON" type with double grooving in the case of PVC wire-ways, andCLIP-ON type for the metallic wire ways. All surfaces shall have smooth finishinside and outside. The top of the side walls of the body shall be suitable for theabove types of fixing arrangement of trunking. PVC trunking or Aluminiumtrunking should have uniform thickness throughout its length and shall be offactory finish.

3. PVC trunking shall be of good quality PVC, free from defects like deformation,unevenness, blisters, cavities etc.

Dimensions

(i) The sizes of mini trunking for the various sizes of cables and themaximum number of 650/1100 V grade PVC insulated aluminium / copper


141

conductor cables that can be carried in one trunking are given size wise inTable given later.

(ii) The thickness of the mini trunking & adaptable trunking shall be 1 mmminimum.

(iii) When mini trunking cover is clipped onto the trunking body,cover should completely overlap on the base (casing),

Outlet Boxes

The outlet boxes such as switch boxes, regulator boxes and theirphenolic laminated sheet covers shall be as per requirements.

INSTALLATION

1. Attachment to wall and ceiling

(i) The mini trunking and adaptable tmnking shall be fixed by meansof suitable screws to approved type of asbestos or fiber fixing plugs, atintervals not exceeding 60 cm for all sizes for mini trunking. In case ofAdaptable tmnking, the screwing distance shall be such that the weight ofthe trunking & cable hold firmly on the wall or ceiling. On either side of thejoints, the distance of the fixing arrangement shall not exceed 15 cm from,the joint.

(ii) All trunking body shall be fixed directly on wall or ceiling as above.

(iii) Trunking shall be used only on dry walls and ceiling, avoidingoutside walls as far as possible and shall not be buried in walls not fixed inproximity to gas, steam or water pipes or immediately below the heater.

(iv) Adaptable trunking shall be with pill off cover for protectionagainst dust. Pill off cover shall be removed only on completion of paintingof walls.

2. Passing through floors or walls

When conductors pass through floors, the same shall be carried in anapproved PVC conduit, or heavy gauge steel conduit properly bushed atboth ends. The conduit shall be carried 20 cm above floor level and 2.5cm below ceiling level and neatly terminated into the casing. Steelconduit pipes wherever accessible shall be securely earthed.

3. Joints in casing and capping

(i) The wire ways in straight runs should be in single piece as far aspossible so as to avoid joints. Trunking shall be of 2m or 3m standardlength for the ' ease of installation.

(ii) All joints shall be scar-fed or cut diagonally in longitudinal section, and shallbe smoothed down by filing to make the joints a very close fit as far aspossible and without burrs. They shall be screwed at joints with two ormore screws as would be necessary.

(iii) Joints arising out of bends or diversion shall be done usingstandard accessories like Internal angle. External angle, Flat angle(elbows). Flat junction (T) and end caps. For the separation of data andpower cables there shall be partition in both trunking and accessories.Internal and external angle shall have variable angle for the alignment at


142

the wall comers. In no case the radius of curvature of the cables inside abend shall be less than 6 times their overall diameter.

4. Trunking should be of white colour in case of PVC trunking and of whiteor grey colour in case of Aluminium trunking.

(i) Mini Trunking attached to ceiling shall be carried completely acrossthe ceiling/wall whenever required by the engineer in charge, instead ofbeing stopped at an outlet location and in all such cases, dummy minitrunking must be provided.

5. Attachment of capping

(i) Wherever required by the Engineer in Charge, capping shall not befixed until the work has been inspected with the wires in position andapproved. The inspection will be done from time to time as the workprogresses.

(ii) Cover shall be attached to body after all the insulated wires arelaid inside.(iii) No screws or nails shall be used for fixing PVC cover to the body.

(iv) Aluminium cover shall be fixed by using cadmium plated flat head /round head screws with an axial spacing not exceeding 30 cm.

6. Installation of Cables

(i) For ease of maintenance, cables carrying direct current oralternating current shall always be bunched so that the outgoing and returncables are drawn in the same trunking.

(ii) Mini trunking shall be of such a design that it holds the wires inside thetrunking body (casing) at suitable intervals, so that at the time of opening 'of the trunking cover (capping), the wires may remain in position in thetrunking body (casing) and do not fall out.

7. Earth Continuity

(i) A protective (earth continuity) conductor shall be drawn inside forearthing of all metallic boxes of the installations as well as for connectionsto the earth pin of the socket outlets.

(ii) In the case of metallic trunking there shall be a metallic linkbetween adjacent trunking covers with screw connections, andalso connections from the end casing to the earth terminal of metallicboxes / outlets / switch boards as per the case may be, for the completebody earthing of the system.

TABLE

Maximum number of PVC insulated 650/1100 Volt GradeAluminium / Copper conductor cable conforming to IS: 694-1990

Nominal 10/15 20/15 25/15 32 mmx 40 mmx 40 mmx


143

crosssectional

area

mmx10 mm

mmx10 mm

mmx16 mm

16mm 25 mm 40 mm

1.5 3 5 6 8 12 18

2.5 2 4 5 6 9 15

4 2 3 4 5 8 12

6 2 3 4 6 9

10 1 2 3 5 8

16 1 2 4 6

25 1 3 5

35 2 4

50 1 3

70 1 2

Note: Dimensions shown above are outer dimensions of mini trunking.


144

CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) :-

Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) are to be used in final power distribution and branchcircuits, as well as control circuits for effective protection against overload and short-circuit protection. These shall conform to latest Indian and / or International Standards,

IS : 8828-1996, IEC : 60898-1995

Miniature circuit breakers shall be quick make and break type for 240/415 V AC, 50 Hzapplication with magnetic thermal release for over current and short circuit protection.

The breaking capacity shall not be less than 10kA at 415V AC.

MCBs shall be C-curve type and DIN mounted.

The offered MCBs should be ‘ISI’ marked. ‘ISI’ marking on the MCB should be clearlydisplayed (printed) on the MCB. It should not be displayed by pasting stickers or printing.Name of the manufacturer shall also be printed clearly on body of MCB. Also make andbrand shall be clearly identified on each MCB.

Technical Features

Isolation : to ensure complete electrical Isolation of downstream circuit or equipment ,when the MCB is switched OFF ( to be marked on the MCB in symbolic form)

IP 20 Degree of Protection : to prevent electrical shocks by accidental touch to any liveparts, by providing finger touch proof terminals.

Positive Contact Indication : In accordance with IEC-60947-2, MCBs for thischaracteristic shall have positive contact indication, so that in the event of accidentalcontact welding during faults, MCB knob does not show OFF position. This is essential toprevent any serious accidents during maintenance.

Energy Limitation Class-3 : to ensure minimum let through energy in the event of afault, for safety of downstream circuit equipment. ( to be mentioned on the MCB as perstandards )

Low Power Loss : MCBs should have low power loss, in any case not more thanprescribed limits of standards. Energy efficient MCBs having lesser power loss thanprescribed in relevant standards will be preferred.

Line-Load Reversibility : to allow line or load connections from top or bottom terminalswithout any risk of unsafe operation or protection performance of MCB.

Ease of Installation: MCBs should have design to help easy & fast installation on DINrail, with provision of dual position bistable clips for secured mounting.

Large Terminal Design : MCBs to have minimum 25 sq.mm. terminals for ratings below32A, and 35 sq.mm. for ratings of 32A and above, to ensure perfect termination ofconnections. Terminals of MCBs shall have captive screws.

Ease of Identification : Basic technical parameters, rating, operating voltage, etc. shallbe printed on front face of MCB for ease of identification.

Mechanical Life shall be 20000 operations and Service life at rated load for In below 32Ashall be 20000 and for In above 32A shall be 10000 operations.


145

B. Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker / Residual Current Circuit Breaker - CurrentOperated Type (ELCB / RCCB / RCBO)

Residual Current Circuit Breakers shall conform to IEC 61008.& IS12640.ISI marking is compulsory on RCCB.The RCCBs shall have sensitivities of 30 mA, 100mA, 300 mA as per the requirement /as per BOQ. For People Protection the sensitivity must not be more than 30mA.

A 100/300mA RCCB is recommended for Protection against fire

The RCCBs shall have disconnection facility with suitability for Isolation and PositiveContact Indication, and shall be immune towards nuisance tripping due to Transientovervoltages.

The RCCBs shall have trip indication facility on the front face.

System of operation

ELCB/ RCCB/RCBO shall work on the principle of core balance transformer. Theincoming shall pass through torroidal core transformer. As long as the currents in thephase and neutral shall be the same, no electro motive force shall be generated inthe secondary winding of the transformer. In the event of a leakage to earth, anunbalance shall be created which shall cause a current to be generated in thesecondary winding, this current shall be fed to a highly sensitive miniature relay,which shall trip the circuit if the earth leakage current exceeds a pre-determinedcritical value. ELCB/RCCB/RCBO shall be current operated independent of linevoltage. Current sensitivity shall be of 30mA at 240/415V AC or as specified in BOQ /drawings and shall have a minimum of 10000 electrical operations. The RCBO shallalso provide over load and short circuit protection in addition to the earth leakageprotection.

Mechanical Operation

The moving contacts of the phases shall be mounted on a common bridge, actuated by arugged toggle mechanism. Hence, the closing/opening of all three phases shall occursimultaneously. This also shall ensure simultaneous opening of all the contacts under trippingconditions.

Neutral Advance Feature

The neutral moving contact shall be so mounted on the common bridge that, at the time ofclosing, the neutral shall make contact. First before the phases; and at the time ofopening, the neutral shall break last after allowing the phases to open first. This is animportant safety feature which is also required by regulations.

Testing Provision

A test device shall be incorporated to check the integrity of earth leakage detectionsystem and the tripping mechanism. When the unit is connected to service, pressingthe test knob shall trip the ELCB/RCCB/RCBO and the operating handle shall moveto the “OFF” position.


146

C. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB's)

The rated normal current should be specified at 40°C

The present specification applies to moulded-case circuit breakers (MCCB) from

16A to 800 Amp for AC (50/60Hz) low voltage electrical installation from 220V to

415V. MCCB shall be equipped with a trip Unit that offers the appropriate level of

performance to fit to the application.

MCCBs shall be designed for both vertical and horizontal mounting, without any adverseeffect on Electrical performance. It shall be possible to supply power either from theupstream or downstream side.

For a MCCB rating frame given, MCCBs dimensions shall be the same whateverthe ultimate breaking capacity.

MCCB shall have a rated operational voltage of 415 V and insulation voltage of 600 V (AC50/60 Hz),

The breaking capacity performance certificates shall be available for category A tothe above mentioned standards. The MCCBs shall have a rated service breakingcapacity (Ics) equal to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) at defined operationalvoltage.

The moulded case circuit breaker shall have a breaking capacity as mentioned againsteach in Schedule of Quantity at 415 volts. Wherever required, higher breaking capacitybreakers to meet the system short circuit fault shall be used. In absence of any capacityspecifically mentioned in the bill of quantities and drawings, following breaking capacitiesshall be used –

100 / 125 Amp : 25 KA

160/200/250/300 Amp : 35 KA

400/630/800 Amp : 50 KA

Circuit breaker design

Safety

For maximum safety, the power contacts shall be insulated in an enclosure made

of a thermosetting material from other functions such as the operating mechanism, the

case, the trip unit and auxiliaries (ON/OFF/Trip Contact, Shun t, Under Voltage etc.)

All poles shall operate simultaneously for circuit breaker opening, closing and tripping.

Isolation

In order to ensure suitability for isolation complying with IEC 60947-2 § 7-27:

MCCBs shall be actuated by a toggle or handle that clearly indicates the three positions:ON, OFF and TRIPPED.

MCCB should clearly indicate the suitability for isolation in the name plate identified by


147

the symbol.

The operating mechanism shall be designed such that the toggle or handle can

only be in OFF position (O) if the power contacts are all actually separated, in

OFF position, the toggle or handle shall indicate the isolation position.

MCCBs shall be able to receive a device for locking in the “isolated” position,with up to 3 padlocks, Ø8 maximum.

MCCBs shall be equipped with a “push to trip” button in front to test operation and theopening of the poles.

MCCB rating, “push to trip” button, performances and contact position indication must beclearly visible and accessible from the front, through the front panel or the door of theswitchboard.

Class II Front Face

MCCBs shall be designed to prevent access to live parts when the cover is removed ,means main current path of the circuit breaker should be isolated from auxiliary sectioni.e MCCB shall offer class –II front face.

Current limitation, durabilityFrom 16 A to 800 A rating frame, MCCBs shall equip a double breaking type rotary

contactmechanism, having current- limiting feature to limit let through energy on the installation.

The electrical durability of MCCBs, as defined by IEC 60947-2 standard, shall be at leastequal to 3 times the minimum required by the standard (8000 operations up to 250A &4000 operations up to 800A).

Auxiliaries and accessorie

MCCBs shall be designed to enable safe on-site installation of auxiliaries such as voltage

releases (shunt & under voltage releases) and indication switches as follows: Field installable auxiliary contacts for signalising different functions, as: open/ closed

position, fault signal, electrical fault (including earth fault) signal, all auxiliaries shallbe common for the entire range,

They shall be separated from power circuits, All electrical auxiliaries shall be of the snap-in type and fitted with terminal blocks, Auxiliary function and terminals shall be permanently engraved on the case of the

circuit breaker and the auxiliary itself. The addition of auxiliaries shall not increase the volume of the circuit breaker. Rotary handle, shall not mask or block device settings, and should indicate three

positions O (OFF),I (ON)and tripped. Rotary handle should have push to trip button. Rotary handle should have provision to install lock and key arrangement for

interlocking purpose (Example: 2 lock 1 key ,3 lock two key etc.) Rotary handle shall ensure IP40 for direct type and IP 55 for extended Rotary handle.

Protections requirements

General


148

MCCBs shall comprise a device, designed to trip the circuit-breaker in the event of

high-value short-circuit currents. This device shall be independent of the thermal

magnetic or electronic trip unit.

MCCBs up to 250A shall be equipped with Thermal magnetic trip unit.

MCCBs with ratings over 250A shall be equipped with electronic trip units.

Thermo-magnetic trip unit should have: Adjustable thermal protection from 75 – 100% times the current rating Protection setting shall apply to all circuit breakers pole thru single knob from the front of

MCCB without opening the front cover of the MCCB. Fixed magnetic protection for current ratings up to 250 A.

Electronic trip units should have: Adjustable over load protection from 50 -100% times the current rating Variable short circuit protection from 2 to 10 Ir. Protection setting shall apply to all circuit breakers pole thru single knob from the front of

MCCB without opening the front cover of the MCCB In case of 4 pole MCCB neutral should be adjustable as a Neutral unprotected or Neutral

Protection.

Earth protection

Earth Fault protection,Where ever specified, MCCB should have Earth fault protection asprovision. MCCB earth fault protection should have following settings.

Selection of Ir MCCB rating. Earth fault sensitivity selection from 10 – 60% In Time delay selection in case of Earth Fault with instantaneous feature.

Installation

It should be possible to terminate Aluminium cable of required size for the defined currentcarrying capacity. The requisite size should be made available by means of extendedterminals (as a standard offer) in case the direct terminals are not of adequate size.Adequate phase to phase clearance has to be ensured in case of extended terminations.

The circuit breaker should provide the flexibility of terminating line and load from anydirection. Manufacturers should test the circuit breaker for this condition and requisite testcertificate should be available.

Phase barrier should be provided as a standard feature.

Testing

a) Original test certificate of the MCCB as per IEC/IS 60947 - 2 shall be furnished.

b) Pre-commissioning tests on the switchboard panel incorporating the MCCB shall bedone as per standard specifications.


149


150

D. AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER

General:

Circuit breakers shall be of 3pole or 4pole, air break, moulded case, horizontal draw-out typefully interlocked or fixed type as specified and designed to deliver performances withoutperiodical maintenance.

Air circuit breakers (ACB) shall comply with standards IS/IEC 60947-1 & 2. The breakersshall be tested & certified at CPRI/ERDA.

Air circuit breakers shall have a rated operational voltage of 600 V AC (50/60Hz).

The rated insulation voltage should be atleast 1000V AC (50/60Hz) & impulse voltage of 12kV.

Circuit breakers shall be capable of carrying the full load current defined for 50o C without anyderating.

Circuit breaker main contacts shall be silver plated high grade copper with each pole encasedin a reinforced polyester casing completely insulated from each other internally and offerdouble insulation for the operators on the breaker front face.

Circuit breakers shall be of single frame having uniform “height x width x depth” with commondoor cut-outs.

Performances:

The ACB breaking capacity performance certificates shall be available for category Baccording to IEC 60947-2 standard.

The tests shall be carried out with a breaking performance during operation (Ics) andadmissible short time withstand (Icw) equal to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu). i.e. Icu =Ics = Icw = 50KA for 1 Sec. or as specified in BOQ.

All Air circuit breakers can be reverse fed without reduction in performance.

The Circuit Breaker shall have higher Mechanical life i.e. 20000 operations up to 1600A &16000 operations for ratings >1600A.

The breakers shall have high electrical life i.e. 5000 operations up to 1600A & 5000operations for ratings 1600A without maintenance

The operating mechanism shall be of the Open/Closed/Open stored-energy spring type. Theclosing time shall be less than or equal to 70 milliseconds to ensure faster closing.

The operating mechanism shall be of fast opening type with opening time of breaker shouldbe <40ms & spring charging time of less than 5 seconds.

All 4 Pole ACBs shall have fully rated neutral equal to rating of the breaker & shall beprotected against over-load & short-circuit with provisions for settings at neutral for protection,half protection or no protection.

Accessories & Auxiliaries:

Electrical operated Circuit Breakers shall be operated with remote operation functioncombined with spring charging motor, closing coil & shunt trip coil having control voltage of240 VAC. The electrical operated breaker shall also be provided with operating handle formanual closing, mechanical ON/OFF indicator, spring charged indicator, etc.,


151

Shunt trip and closing coil shall be of typical design and both should be accessible from thefront of ACB after opening the cover, without disturbing any other part/release.

Circuit breaker shall be provided with under-voltage trip release which shall automatically tripthe breaker for voltages in the range of 35% to 70% of the system voltage.

The ACB design shall be modular in construction that is it shall be possible to mount the coilsfrom the front without removing the breaker from Cradle.

All electrical auxiliaries including the motor spring charging mechanism shall be fieldadaptable and should not require any calibration at site or the necessity for any tool (except ascrewdriver).

The Circuit Breaker shall have minimum 6 changeover auxiliary contacts rated at 10 A240/380V volts 50 Hz. There should exist facility to add one more set of 4 contacts asrequired.

Option for fixing Ready-to-close contact shall exist for indicating that all safety parameters arechecked & enabling closure of breaker, ensuring at-most safety for the user.

All accessories & auxiliaries should be common for entire range of circuit breakers.

Safety:

It shall be possible to connect all auxiliary wiring from the front face of the air circuit breaker.This wiring shall be taken through a set of disconnecting contacts, so that all auxiliary wiringis automatically disconnected in the isolated position.

There exists clear indication of the following parameters in the front panel of the circuitbreakers:

ON - Circuit breaker closedOFF - Circuit breaker openSpring Charged – Ready-to-closeSpring charged – Not ready-to-closeSpring discharged circuit breaker in "service" position (drawout only) circuit breaker in "test" position (drawout only) circuit breaker in "isolated" position (drawout only)

Mechanical and electrical anti-pumping devices shall be incorporated in the circuit breakersas required.

The circuit breaker shall be fitted with arc chutes on each pole designed to permit rapiddispersion, cooling and extinction of the arc. Arc Chute cover should be integral part ofbreaker to safeguard persons from arc during extinction & it shall be removable on site.

The automatic shutters should be integral part of breaker & locking arrangement should beprovided as per standards.

The with-drawable circuit breaker shall have the following three distinct and separatepositions, which shall be indicated on the face of the panel.

"Service" -- Both main and auxiliary circuits are connected "Test" – All auxiliary circuits are connected & main circuits are

disconnected "Isolated" -- Both main and auxiliary circuits are disconnected


152

The circuit breaker shall be suitable for moving out to Maintenance Position with thetelescopic rails extended and with the cubicle door opened. The routine maintenance shall becapable of being carried out in this position.

There should be a positive locking at these positions while racking out or racking in for clear& confirmative indications as the position is reached. A push button shall be available torelease the lock.

Interlocks:

It shall not be possible to with-draw the breaker from the cubicle in "ON" condition. Toachieve this, suitable mechanism shall be provided to trip the breaker before the Breaker isisolated.

It shall not be possible to switch “ON” the breaker until it is either in the fully inserted positionor for testing purposes it is in the fully isolated position.

It shall not be possible for the Circuit Breaker to be plugged in unless it is in the OFF position.

A safety catch shall be provided to ensure that the movement of the breaker, as it iswithdrawn, is checked before it is completely out of the cubicle, thus preventing its accidentalfall due to its weight.

A door interlock shall be provided so that it shall not be possible to open the door until the aircircuit breaker moving part is in the disconnected position.

A mis-match interlocking shall be provided to prevent insertion of a draw-out type circuitbreaker having a rating higher than the current rating of the fixed part.

The racking handle shall be stored on the air circuit breaker in such a manner as to beaccessible without defeating the door interlocking.

Provision should exist for fixing key lock to have secured interlocking with the other circuitbreakers.

The breaker shall be locked in disconnected position using key lock or padlock to avoidaccidental charging of the breaker during maintenance phase.

Terminations:

All circuit breakers shall be fully tropicalized as standard & suitable for terminating copper oraluminium bus bars.

Both fixed & draw-out circuit breakers shall have single pole-pitch to ensure sufficient & saferclearances between phases.

Provision shall exist to change the orientation of rear terminations from to horizontal tovertical connection or vice-versa at installation to enable ease of bus bar/cable terminations.

Protections:

The Circuit breaker protection shall be through micro processor based trip units.

The micro processor release should be self powered type without any auxiliary power supplyduring normal operation of the breaker.

The circuit breaker control unit shall measure the true r.m.s value of the current.

The protection release shall have following protections as standard.


153

Adjustable over load current (Ir) settings from 40% to 100% of rating ofACB (In).

Over load time setting (tr) from 0.5s, 1s, 2s, 4s…….24s as field selectablecurves

Short circuit setting (Isd) from 1.5 to 10 times of Ir settingShort circuit time delay adjustable from 0 to 400 msec. Instantaneous (Ii) protection with an adjustable pick-up and an OFF

position.Earth fault setting adjustable in absolute Ampere with time delay settings

from 0 to 400 ms.

I2t ON / I2t OFF options shall be available for short-circuit & earth fault protections to enhancediscrimination with downstream devices.

Individual fault trip LED indications shall be available on the trip unit for easy & fasteridentifying the cause of fault.

The trip unit shall have integral test facility to verify the healthiness and to avoid externalcalibration.

The release shall be self diagnostic with separate indication in case of mal functioning.

It shall be possible to change the protection settings on line and the circuit breaker need notbe switched of while adjusting the setting.

Circuit breakers shall conform to Electromagnetic compatibility tests (EMC) as specified inIEC60947-2.

The Circuit breaker control unit shall be interchangeable on site for adaptation to changes inthe installation.

The control unit shall have thermal memory throughout the range to store temperature risedata in case of repetitive overload or earth fault for protecting the cables and loads.

Circuit breakers in the outgoing feeders shall be provided with micro processor / Thermomagnetic based trip units (as per BOQ) offering protection against over load (Long time) &Instantaneous protection ensuring total discrimination.

Testing

Testing of each circuit breaker shall be carried out at the works as per IEC:60947 and theoriginal test certificate shall be furnished in triplicate. The tests shall incorporate atleastthe following:

i) Impulse withstand test

ii) Insulation test

iii) Di-electric rigidity /Insulation test

iv) Mechanical operation checking

v) Thermal protection with a current of 3ith starting from cold conditions.


154

SAFETY PROCEDURE

1. While the Indian Electricity Rules 1956, as amended upto date, are to be followed in theirentirety, particular attention is drawn to the various clauses indicated in Appendix 'C'. Anyinstallation or portion of installation, which does not comply with these rules, should begot rectified immediately.

2. The detailed instructions on safety procedures given in B.I.S. Code No. 5216-1982 "Codeof Safety Procedures and Practices in Electrical Works" shall be strictly followed.

3. a) Schematic diagramIt shall be responsibility of the JE (E)/AE (E) to ensure that for each building, acomprehensive schematic diagram is prepared starting from the main board uptothe final DBs. All such boards are to be duly marked and numbered.

Similarly, for each campus consisting of substation/substations and a number ofbuildings, a comprehensive power distribution schematic diagram for the entirecampus shall be prepared.

Based on additions/alterations such diagrams should be updated from time totime.

b) Keep premises clean

Premises like substations, switch rooms, pump house, generating rooms etc.shall be kept clean. Such premises should not be used to store broken furniture,dismantled materials, waste material, parking boxes etc.

c) Keep all electrical shafts clean and locked

Such shafts should not be used for dumping floor malwa etc.

d) Protected premises

All premises like substation, pump house etc. to be maintained as protectedarea, admission allowed to authorized persons only.

e) Also, the frontage of such areas shall be kept free and parking etc. in front shallnot be allowed.

4. No inflammable materials shall be stored in places other than the rooms speciallyconstructed for this purpose in accordance with the provisions of Indian ExplosivesAct.

5. Rubber or insulating mats should be provided in front of the main switchboards or anyother control equipments of medium voltage and above.

6. Protective and safety equipments such as rubber gauntlets or gloves, earthing rods,linemen's belt, portable artificial respiration apparatus etc. should be provided in eachsub-station, service center/enquiry office and important installations. Where electricwelding or such other nature of work is undertaken, goggles shall also be provided.

7. Necessary number of caution boards such as "Man on Line, Don't switch on" should bereadily available in each sub-station, enquiry office and important installations.

8. Standard first aid boxes containing materials as prescribed by the St. John AmbalanceBrigade or Indian Red Cross should be provided in each sub-station, enquiry office andimportant installations and should be readily available.

9. Periodical examination of the first aid facilities and protective and safety equipmentsprovided at the various installations shall be undertaken for their adequacy andeffectiveness and a proper record shall be maintained.


155

10. Charts (One in English and another one in the regional language) displaying methods ofgiving artificial respiration to a recipient of electrical shock should be prominentlydisplayed at appropriate places.

11. A Chart containing the names, addresses and telephone numbers of nearest autheorizedmedical practitioners, hospitals, fire brigade and also of the officers in executive chargeshall be displayed prominently along with the First Aid Box.

12. Executive Engineers should take immediate steps to train supervisory and authorizedpersons of the Engineering staff viz. A.Es., J.Es, Head Electricians, Foremen,Electricians and Wiremen in the First Aid Practices, including various methods of artificialrespiration with the help of local authorities such as Fire Brigade, St. John AmbulanceBrigade, Indian Red Cross or other recognized institutions equipped to impart suchtraining, as prompt rendering of artificial respiration can save life at times of electricshock.

13. All new recruits should be given such First Aid Training immediately afterappointment.

14. All Supervisory and authorized persons of the Engineering staff should be deputed forrefresher course in First Aid Training after every two years.

15. Details of preventive maintenance to be undertaken shall be in accordance with thechapter 14 of these specifications. All preventive maintenance works shall be preplannedas far as possible and names of persons who are assigned to this work should beentered in a logbook.

16. Electrical wiring and control switches should be periodically inspected and anydefective wiring, broken parts of switches which will expose live parts, should be

replaced immediately to make the installations safe for the user.

17. Reports indicating details of preventive maintenance works done should be kept in aregister by each Junior Engineer (E) and should bear signatures of Assistant Engineerand Executive Engineer by way of checks.

18. No work shall be undertaken on live installations, or on installations, which could beenergized unless another person is present to immediately isolate the electric supply incase of any accident and to render first aid, if necessary.

19. No work of live L.T. switch board in the sub-stations should be handled by a personbelow the rank of a Wireman and such a work should preferably be done in the

presence of the Junior Engineer (E) in charge of the work.

20. When working on or near live installations, suitably insulated tools should be used, andspecial care should be taken to see that those tools accidentally do not drop on liveterminals causing shock or dead short.

21. The electrical switchgears and distribution boards should be clearly marked to indicatethe areas being controlled by them.

22. Before starting any work on the existing installation, it should be ensured that the electricsupply to that portion in which the work is undertaken is preferably cut off. Precautionslike displaying "Men at Work" caution boards on the controlling switches, removing fusecarrier from these switches, and these fuse carriers being kept with the person workingon the installation, etc. should be taken against accidental energisation. "Permit toWork" should be obtained from the Junior Engineer-in-Charge. No work on H.T. mainshould be undertaken unless it is made dead and discharged to earth with an earthinglead of appropriate size. The discharge operation shall be repeated several times and theinstallation connected to earth positively before any work is started.


156

23. Before energizing on an installation after the work is completed, it should be ensured thatall tools have been removed and accounted, no person is present inside any enclosure ofthe switch board etc. any earthing connection made for doing the work has beenremoved, "Permit to Work" is received back duly signed by the person to whom it wasissued in token of having completed the work and the installation being ready for re-energising and "Men at Work" caution boards removed.

24. In case of electrical accidents and shock, the electrical installation on which the accidentoccurred should be switched off immediately and the affected person should beimmediately removed from the live installation by pulling him with the help of his coat,shirt, wooden rod, broom handle or with any other dry cloth or paper. He should beremoved from the place of accident to a nearby safe place and artificial respirationcontinuously given as contained in B.I.S. Code and Standard prescribed by St. JohnAmbulance Brigade or Fire Brigade.

25. While artificial respiration on the affected person is started immediately, help of FireBrigade and Medical Practitioner should be called for and artificial respiration should becontinued uninterrupted until such help arrives.

26. These instructions should be explained in Hindi/local language to those staff that doesnot understand English.

27. Executive Engineers should take particular care to ensure that these instructions areimparted to the existing staff and as well as to the new entrants.


157

TESTING OF INSTALLATION

SCOPE

This chapter describes the details of tests to be conducted in the completed internalelectrical installations, before commissioning.

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 TESTSOn completion of installation, the following tests shall be carried oul:-

1) Insulation resistance test.2) Polarity test of switch.3 ) Earth continuity test.4) Earth electrode resistance test.

1.2 Witnessing of testsTesting shall be carried out for the completed installations, in the presence of andto the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge by the contractor. All test resultsshall be recorded and submitted to the Department.

1.3 Test instrumentsAll necessary test instruments for the tests shall be arranged by the contractor ifso required by the Engineer-in-charge.

2.0 INSULATION RESISTANCE

2.1 The insulation resistance shall be measured by applying between earth and thewhole system of conductors, or any section thereof with all fuses in place, and allswitches closed, and except in earthed concentric wiring, all lamps in position, orboth poles of the installation otherwise electrically connected together, a directcurrent pressure of not less than twice the working pressure, provided it need notexceed 500 volts for medium voltage circuits. Where the supply is derived from athree wire D.C., or a polyphase A.C. system, the neutral pole of which isconnected to earth either directly or through added resistance, the workingpressure shall be deemed to be that which is maintained between the phaseconductor and the neutral.

2.2 The insulation resistance shall also be measured between all the conductorsconnected to one pole, or phase conductor of the supply, and all the conductorsconnected to the neutral, or to the other pole, or phase conductors of the supplywith all the lamps in position and switches in "off position, and its value shall benot less than that specified in sub-clause 16.2.3.

2.3 The insulation resistance in mega ohms measured as above shall not be lessthan 12.5 mega ohms for the wiring with PVC insulated cables, subject to aminimum of 1 mega ohm.

2.4 Where a whole installation is being tested, a lower value than that given by theformula, subject to a minimum of 1 mega ohm, is acceptable.

2.5 A preliminary and similar test may be made before the lamps etc. are installed,and in this event the insulation resistance to earth should not be less than 25mega ohms for the wiring with PVC insulted cables, subject to a minimum of 2mega ohms.


158

2.6 The term "outlet" includes every point along with every switch, except that aswitch combined with a socket outlet, appliance or lighting fitting is regarded asone outlet.

2.7 Control rheostats, heating and power appliances and electric signs may, ifrequired, be disconnected from the circuit during the test, but in that event theinsulation resistance between the case or frame work, and all live parts of eachrheostat, appliance and sign, shall be not less than that specified in the relevantIndian Standard Specifications, or where there is no such Specification, shall benot less than one mega ohm.

3.0 POLARITY TEST OF SWITCH

3.1 In a two wire installation, a test shall be made to verify that all the switches inevery circuit have been fitted in the same conductor throughout, and suchconductor shall be labeled or marked for connection to the phase conductor, or tothe non-earthed conductors of the supply.

3.2 In a three wire or a four wire installation, a test shall be made to verify that everynon-linked single pole switch is fitted in a conductor which is labeled, or markedfor connection to one of the phase conductors of the supply.

3.3 The installation shall be connected to the supply for testing. The terminals of allswitches shall be tested by a test lamp, one lead of which is connected to theearth. Glowing of test lamp to its full brilliance, when the switch is in "on" positionirrespective of appliance in position or not, shall indicate that the switch isconnected to the right polarity.

4.0 TESTINGOFEARTHCONTCNUITYPATH

The earth continuity conductor, including metal conduits and metallic envelopesof cables in all cases, shall be tested for electric continuity. The electrical resis-tance of the same along with the earthing lead, but excluding any addedresistance, or earth leakage circuit breaker, measured from the connection withthe earth electrode to any point in the earth continuity conductor in the completedinstallation shall not exceed one ohm.

5.0 MEASUREMENT OF EARTH ELECTRODE RESISTANCE

5.1 Two auxiliary earth electrode, besides the test electrode, are placed at suitabledistance from the test electrode (see figure 14). A measure current is passedbetween the electrode 'A' to be tested and an auxiliary current electrode 'C', andthe potential difference between the electrode 'A' and auxiliary potential 'B' ismeasured. The resistance of the test electrode 'A' is then given by:

R = VI

Where,R - Resistance of the test electrode in ohms,

V - Reading of the voltmeter in volts.I - Reading of the ammeter in amps.

5.2 (i) Stray current flowing in the soil may produce serious errors in themeasurement of earth resistance. To eliminate this, hand drivengenerator is used.


159

(ii) If the frequency of the supply of hand driven generator coincides withthe frequency of stray current, there will be wandering of instrumentpointer. An increase or decrease of generator speed will cause this todisappear.

5.3 At the time of test, the test electrode shall be separated from the earthingsystem.

5.4 The auxiliary electrodes shall be of 13 mm diameter mild steel rod driven upto 1m into the ground.

5.5 All the three electrodes shall be so placed that they are independent of theresistance area of each other. If the test electrode is in the form of a rod, pipe orplate, the auxiliary current electrode 'C' shall be placed at least 30 m away fromit, and the auxiliary potential electrode 'B' shall be placed mid-way between them.

5.6 Unless three consecutive readings of test electrode resistance agree, the testshall be repeated by increasing the distance between electrodes A and C upto50m, and each time placing the electrode B midway between them.

5.7 On these principles, "Megger Earth Tester", containing a direct reading ohmmeter, a hand driven generator and auxiliary electrodes are manufactured fordirect reading of earth resistance of electrodes.

6.0 TEST CERTIFICATE

On completion of an electrical installation (or an extension to an installation), acertificate shall be furnished by the contractor, countersigned by the certifiedsupervisor under whose direct supervision the installation was carried out. Thiscertificate shall be in the prescribed form as given in Appendix 'E' in addition tothe test certificate required by the local Electric Supply Authorities.


160

ERECTION & COMMISSIONING1.0 GENERAL

1.1 EQUIPMENT ERECTION

a) The equipment in disassembled condition shall be received at site by thecontractor.

b) The contractor shall unpack, assemble all parts, mount and wire up looseequipment, fitting and accessories and complete all connections.

c) The contractor shall mount the equipment on respective foundation/ supports, level& align the same & arrange for necessary grouting/anchoring.

d) The erection work shall be carried out in compliance with manufacturer's instructionand shall include all adjustments, checks and measurements.

e) The contractor shall record results of all erection tests and measurements andfurnish copies of the same to the owner for his reference and record.

f) Any internal wiring of the equipment, which has been left incomplete because ofshipping, split or which requires minor modifications shall be carried out by thecontractor. This includes mounting of items like relays, meters etc. and connectingthe same as per wiring scheme diagram furnished by the original manufacturers.

1.2 CONSUMABLES AND HARDWAREThe contractor shall furnish all erection materials, hardware and consumables requiredfor the completion of the installation. The materials shall include but not limited to thefollowing:a) Consumables : welding rods & gas, oil & grease, cleaning fluids, paints,

electrical tape, soldering materials etc.b) Hardware : bolts, nuts, washers, screws, brackets, supports,

clamps, hangers, saddles, cleats, sills, shims etc.c) Materials : junction boxes, terminal blocks, connectors, ferrules,

lugs, brass glands, rigid/flexible conduits, cables, groundwires etc.

Supply of cement, sand, stone etc. required for the execution of the contract shall beresponsibility of the contractor.

1.3 ERECTION TOOLS & TACKLES

a) The contractor shall provide all tools, tackle, implements, module equipment suchas chain pulley block, trailers etc. which are required for transportation, handlingand erection of equipment.

b) Special erection tools, if any, furnished by the Manufacturer along with theequipment may be used by the contractor. such tools and equipment, however,shall be returned in good working conditions to the owner on completion of the job.

c) The contractor shall also arrange for major testing equipment as list below:

Insulation Tester : Motor operated Megger 1000V & 10KV grade.Hand operated Megger 1000V.


161

Hand driven earth resistance megger, range 0-1/3/30 ohms. Tong testers of suitable ranges. Contact resistance measuring set for micro-ohms. Torque wrench. Primary / secondary injection set and relay testing kit. Multi meters, test lamp, field telephone with buzzer sets, different gauges etc. Streamline filter. Chain pulley block, cable jacks & spindle, cable, collars, electricians tool kit,

jointer's tool kit, fitters tool kit, welding transformer, phase sequence meter,HV testing kit, primary & secondary injection kit.

other test equipment as required for testing and commissioning of the equipmentshall have to be arranged by the contractor.

1.4 METHODS AND WORKMANSHIP

a) All work shall be installed in a first class, neat workman like manner by mechanics /electricians skilled in the trade involved.

b) The erection work shall be supervised by competent supervisors holding relevantsupervisory license from the Government.

c) All details on installation shall be electrically and mechanically correct.

d) The installation shall be carried out in such a manner as to preserve access toother equipment installed.

e) If in the opinion of the contractor any work is insufficiently specified or requiremodification, the contractor shall refer the same in writing to the owner and obtainhis instruction / approval before proceeding with the work.

f) If the contractor fails to refer such instances, any excuse for the faulty erection,poor workmanship or delay in completion shall not be entertained.

g) Equipment and material, which are wrongly installed shall be removed and re-installed to comply with the design requirement at the contractor's expense, to thesatisfaction of the owner/consultant.

h) All scaffolding pipes and frames shall be of tubular steel. Bamboo's/ balliesl timerframes are not permitted under any circumstances. All vertical & horizontalscaffolds shall be of MS pipes of adequate size to withstand the loads & pressures.The working platforms shall be either of conduit pipes or MS bars.

1.5 ALLOWABLE WASTAGE

a) The erection contractor shall make every effort to minimize wastage during erectionwork. In any case, the wastage shall not exceed 1 %

b) Measurement shall be taken at site jointly by contractor and owner'srepresentative.

c) If the actual wastage be more than the quoted figure then equivalent price of thebalance amount will be deducted from contractor's bills.

d) The contractor shall submit a detailed account of materials issued to him aftercompletion of work. The excess materials after completion of job shall be returnedback to the owner's store.


162

1.6 FOUNDATION AND CIVIL WORK

a) The contractor shall check the foundations provided by owner beforecommencement of erection to ensure their suitability.

b) All final adjustments of foundation levels, chipping and dressing of foundationsurfaces, drilling holes on foundation channels to suit the equipment setting andgrouting of anchor bolts, sills, inserts and fastening devices shall be carried out bythe contractor including minor modification of civil work as may be required forerection.

c) Any cutting of masonry work which is necessary shall be done by the Contractor athis own cost and shall be made good to match the original work. The contractorshall obtain approval of owner/ consultant before proceeding with any cutting ofmasonry / concrete work.

1.7 EXCAVATION AND BACK FILLING

a) The contractor shall perform all excavation and back filling as required for thescope of work pecified.

b) The contractor shall make his own arrangement for pumping out any water thatmay accumulate in the excavation.

c) All excavation shall be back filled to the original level with good consolidation.

1.8 REPAIR OF DAMAGE SUBSTAINED DURING TRANSITThe contractor shall repair minor damages sustained during transit or subsequentstorage in purchaser's store. The repair charges shall be paid to the contractor on thebasis of extra work.

1.9 INSPECTION

a) After completion of erection / installation, each piece of equipment shall bethoroughly tested as per approved procedure and inspected in presence of theowner/consultant for correctness and completeness of erection and acceptabilityfor start up.

b) A check list in triplicate will be furnished by the owner/consultant wherein all detailsto be checked and necessary instruction shall be listed. the inspection andchecking shall strictly follow the checklist.

c) on completion of the inspection (2) copies of the check list duly filled-in shall behanded over to the owner/consultant.

d) This check list shall be jointly signed by the contractor and the owner/consultant.Such endorsement, however, shall not relieve the contractor of his obligationsunder the contract.

2.0 11 KV SWITCHGEARS

2.1 11 KV HT Switchgears shall be installed in accordance with IS:3072 and manufacturer'sinstructions. The contractor shall be required to install and align any channel sills which


163

form part of the foundation. The HT Switchgears shall be made absolutely vermin proof.

2.2 Control wiring (if any) between 11 KV HT switchgears & other electrical equipment shallbe carried out as per the instructions of the manufacturers & site-in-charge.

3.0 TRANSFORMER

3.1 Installation of the transformer shall be in accordance with the IS : 1886, manufacturer'sinstructions and as per the enclosed drawings.

3.2 Care shall be taken during handling of insulating oil to preventing ingress of moisture orforeign material. Testing and sampling of oil shall be in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions and related IS. If oil filtration is required the same shall be carried out at siteby the Contractor.

3.3 Control wiring between Transformer & other electrical panels shall be carried out as perthe manufacturer's drawings and as per the instructions of site - in - charge.

4.0 415 V BUS DUCT

4.1 Bus duct will be received in transportable pieces. The Contractor shall erect the bus ductincluding bends, wall seating copper flexible at both ends and complete all connections inaccordance with Manufacturer's drawings. The work also includes erection of steelhangers / supports for these bus ducts wherever necessary.

4.2 All steel structure / support / hardware for supporting bus duct shall be calculated by thecontractor.

5.0 MAIN PCC / CAPACITOR PANELS

5.1 All above panels & DBs will be available in split - up - sections for ease of transportationand handling. However in some cases, breakers, busbars relays, meters and controlswitches may be supplied loose to be mounted and connected at site as per the relevantdrawings.

5.2 All alignments leveling, grouting, anchoring and adjustments shall be carried out inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions and/or as directed by the Engineer. Allboards shall be cleaned by using blower before installation.

5.3 All connections in the panels shall be completed, checked and adjusted to ensure safetyand satisfactory operation of the equipment. This includes the following activities:a) Functional test on circuit breakers.b) Setting of protective relays and thermal over load relays.c) Adjustment of zero error of various indicating instruments.d) Testing of thermal overload relays by primary injection and protective relays by

secondary injection.

5.4 In some cases, minor modifications may have to be carried out at site in the wiring of anequipment to meet the requirements of the desired control scheme and the Contractorshall have to do the same at no extra cost.


164

6.0 MISC. ITEMS AND LOCAL PANEL INSTALLATION

6.1 The contractor shall install miscellaneous items such as local control station, start-stoppush button stations, and local starter units. control panels, misc. panel etc.

6.2 These equipment will be generally wall or column mounted excepting a few which arefloor mounted. The exact locations will be as decided by the Engineer at site.

6.3 All supports or brackets need for installation shall be fabricated by the Contractor.

6.4 All welding, cutting, chipping and grinding as and when necessary shall be carried out bythe Contractor at no extra cost.

7.0 CABLING SYSTEM

7.1 CABLE TRAYS AND RACKS

a) The contractor shall install the cable racks, trays, risers, shafts and supports.

b) Cable trays and risers shall be aligned and leveled correctly. All runs shall beinstalled parallel to the trench/building walls and floors except otherwise noted onthe drawings.

c) The contractor shall provide embedded steel inserts/supports on wall, ceiling orfloor by suitable anchoring & shall secure racks and supports by welding these toinserts.

d) The trays in general shall be supported at a distance of 1.5 to 2 meters onhorizontal and vertical run.

e) Cable trays shall be installed as per drawings furnished to the Contractor. Anydeviation in routes shall have the prior approval of the Engineer In charge.

f) Prefabricated cable trays and accessories shall be assembled and erected at siteas per instructions of Manufacturer. Alternately, the Contractor shall fabricate andinstall all cable trays, risers, shafts and supports as agreed upon during finalizationof the award.

g) Sufficient spacing not less than 250 mm shall be provided between trays andmaintained to permit adequate access for installing and maintaining the cables.

h) Contractor shall co-ordinate with other contractors (such as for piping etc.) wherethere is a common support for cable trays and for other services.

i) All necessary steel & all consumables as specified elsewhere shall be provided bythe contractor.

7.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING

a) Cable drums shall be stored on hard and well drained surface so that they may notsink. In no case the drum shall be stored on the flat Le. with flange horizontal.

b) Rolling of drum shall be avoided as far as practicable. For short distance, thedrums may be rolled provided they are rolled slowly and in proper direction asmarked on the drum.

c) In absence of any indication the drums may be rolled in the same direction as it


165

was rolled during taking up the cable.

d) For unreeling the cable, the drum shall be mounted on jacks or on cable wheel.The spindle shall be strong enough to carry the weight without bending.

e) The drum shall be rolled on the spindle slowly so that cable should come out overthe drum and not below the drum.

f) While laying cable, cable rollers shall be used at an interval of 2000 mm. The cableshall be pushed over the roller by a gang of people positioned in between rollers.

g) Cable shall not be pulled from the end without having intermediate pushingarrangement. Bending radius of the cable shall not be less than that is specified bythe manufacturer.

h) All possible care shall be taken during unreeling and laying to avoid damage due totwist, kink or sharp bends.

7.3 CABLE LAYING

a) Cable shall generally be installed in ladder type / perforated trays in trenches orburied in ground except for some short runs in conduit for protection or crossingsthe roads etc.

b) Each length of run shall be physically measured at site before cutting the cable.Contractor shall furnish cable cutting the schedule to engineer in charge withrespect to able drum length available at site and runs of cables & sizes of cables.

c) Cable may also be laid through hume pipes in road crossings etc. The hume pipesshall be supplied and placed in position by the Contractor.

d) Cable laid on trays and risers shall be neatly dressed and clamped at an interval of3000 mm and 900 mm for horizontal and vertical cable run respectively and ateach bend of cable.

e) All power cables shall be clamped individually and control cables shall be clampedin groups of three or four cables.

f) Clamps for multicore cables shall be fabricated of 25 x 3 mm G.I. flats. Single corepower cables shall be laid in trefoil formation and clamped with trefoil clamps madeof Fiber glass/PVC.

g) Cable openings etc. in walls/floor made by the Contractor or by others shall besealed by the Contractor suitably by Hessian tape and bitumen compound or byany other proven method to prevent ingress of water.

h) Directly buried cables shall be laid as per detail shown in drawing. These cablesshall be laid on and covered with sand/raddle earth and protected by brick barriersas sides and precast concrete slab brick on top. Job also involvedigging/excavation of earth and refilling the same after laying of cables. For cableslaid underground a loop of diameter of 3 meters shall be provided near eachterminating ends.

i) After completion of installation and prior to connection, all High Voltage Powercables shall be given a high potential test. The contractor shall provided this HipotTest set having provision of leakage current measurement.

j) Laying cost shall include all above activities including supply and fixing of clamps


166

etc.

k) Cables for machines in clean area shall be laid in suitable size of stainless steelconduit.

7.4 CABLE TAGS AND MARKERS

a) Each cables and conduit run shall be tagged with numbers that appear in the cableschedules. Cables and conduits shall be tagged at every thirty (30) meters. Cablesand conduits shall also be tagged on either side of a floor/wall passage.

b) The tags shall be of PVC or Aluminium with the number engraved on it andsecurely attached to the cable by not less than two turns of G.!. wire.

c) Location of cables laid directly underground shall be indicated clearly by cablemarker made of cast iron.

d) The location of cable joints, if any, shall be clearly indicated with cable marked withan additional inscription "Cable Joint".

e) The marker shall project 100 mm above ground and shall be spaced at an intervalof 30 meters at every change of direction.

f) Where cables are cut from the drums the ends of the cables at the drums shall beproperly sealed.

g) The power and control cable shall be laid with a provision of extra length at one ofthe end terminations. This length shall be confirmed by the Engineer in chargebefore laying.

h) Cost of laying shall also include supply and fixing of tags, cable markers etc.

7.5 TERMINATIONS JOINTS AND CONNECTIONa) The termination, Joints and connections of cables shall be done by qualified

jointers strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instruction drawings and/or asdirected by the Engineer.

b) The work shall include all clamping, fittings, fixing, plumbing, soldering, taping,compound filling, epoxy cable jointing, crimping, connecting, shorting and earthingas required for all such operations should be available with concerned contractor.For all size of L T termination, crimping tool (Hydraulic type) shall be used. Further,inhibiting compound shall be provided before termination.

c) The equipment will be generally provided with blank plates for cable/conduit entryand cable end box for power cables.

d) The Contractor shall perform all drilling, cutting on the blank plates and any minormodification work required to complete the job.

e) If the cable-end box or terminal enclosure provided on the equipment is foundunsuitable and requires major modification, the same shall be carried out by theContractor as extra work item.

f) Control cable cores entering control panel/switch gear / MCC etc. shall be neatlybunched and served with nylon cord or PVC perforated tape to keep in position atthe terminal block.

g) The contractor shall provide oil resistance ferrules for all control cable cores at all


167

terminations including at all junction boxes. and at all terminations. The ferrulesshall carry terminal numbers as per drawing. The ferrules shall be of interlockedplastic type or approved equal.

h) Spare cores shall be similarly tagged, crimped with lug and taped on the ends.Spare cores shall be tagged with individual cable number.

i) Terminations and connections shall be carried out in such a manner as to avoidstrain on the terminals.

j) All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof. Unusedopening, if any shall be effectively closed.

k) Termination kits for HT cables, Straight through joint kits for HT & L T cables, cableof all glands lugs shall be arranged by the Contractor, which includes furnishingconsumable materials such as plumbing and soldering material, electrical tapeincluding bitumen compound/resin if not a part of kit shall be included in theerection rates.

8.0 IMPORTANT NOTES FOR ERECTION ACTIVITIES

8.1 CABLES AND CONDUITS

a) Approximate lengths of cables and conduits runs will be given in the cableschedule. Before commencement of work the Contractor shall take actualmeasurements and prepare his own cable cutting schedules to reduce wastage toa minimum.

b) During the erection period the Contractor shall furnish weekly / fortnightly report oncable position in an approved proforma so as to keep the Engineer In Chargeapprised of the position and to enable him to intimate any procurement action intime.

c) The Contractor shall also maintain and submit when requested, a record of cableinsulation value when drawn from store, after laying, before and aftertermination/jointing.

8.2 EXCAVATION AND BACK FILLING

a) The Contractor shall perform all excavation and back filling as required for thescope of work specified.

b) The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for pumping out any water thatmay accumulate in the excavation.

c) All excavation shall be back filled to the original level with good consolidation.

8.3 FOUNDATION AND CIVIL WORK

a) The contractor shall provide foundations wherever required & in case same hasbeen provided by the employer earlier, same shall be checked for correctnessbefore commencement of erection to ensure their suitability.

b) All final adjustments of foundation levels, chipping and dressing of foundationsurfaces, drilling holes on foundation channels to suit the equipment setting andgrouting of anchor bolts, sills, inserts and fastening devices shall be carried out bythe Contractor including minor modification of civil work as may be required for


168

erection.

c) Any cutting of masonry work which is necessary shall be done by the Contractor athis own cost & shall be made good to match the original work.

The Contractor shall obtain approval of Engineer before proceeding with anycutting ,of masonry /concrete work.

8.4 STRUCTURAL FABRICATION WORKS

a) All chequered plate covers, cable racks, trays, supports, hangers and bracketswherever necessary shall be supplied/fabricated by the Contactor. Steel forfabrication shall be straightened and cleaned of rust and grease. All fabricationshall be free of sharp edge.

b) Every effort shall be made to minimize the wastage of steel as far as practicableduring fabrication. The wastage in no case shall exceed as specified else where inthis specification.

8.5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

a) On completion of erection work, the Contractor shall request the Engineer, forinspection and tests with minimum of fourteen (14) days' advance notice.

b) The Engineer shall arrange for joint inspection of the installation for completenessand correctness of the work. Any defect pointed out during such inspection shall bepromptly rectified by the Contractor.

c) The installation shall be then tested and commissioned in presence of theEngineer.

d) The Contractor shall provide all men, material and equipment required to carry outthe tests.

All rectification, repairs or adjustment work found necessary during inspection,testing and commissioning shall be carried out by the Contractor, without any extracost. The handing over of the installation shall be effected only after the receipt ofwritten instruction from the Purchaser/his authorized representative.

9.0 SCHEDULE OF PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS

9.1 CIRCUIT BREAKER

a) Insulation resistance test on each pole by Meggar.

b) Insulation resistance test on control circuit.

c) Checking of all joints for leakage in breaker.

d) Measurement of contact resistance for all the Three Phases.

e) Checking the auxiliary circuits associated with circuit breaker.

f) Functional check of breaker operation electrically at 70% and 110% of rated D.C.supply voltage.

g) Checking of interlock provided in Control Circuits and tripping through simulatedprotective relay contacts.


169

h) Auto-reclosing duty cycle check wherever auto-reclosing is required.

i) Measurement of resistance of closing and tripping coils.

9.2 CURRENT TRANSFORMER

a) Insulation Resistance test on each winding by Megger to earth and betweenwindings.

b) Checking of all ratios on all cores by Primary injection set.

c) Polarity check on each winding.

d) Continuity test.

e) Check for connection to correct taps.

f) Oil level check.

9.3 EARTHING

a) Continuity of earthing connection.

b) Testing of Earth Resistance of Individual Electrode.

c) Testing of Earth Resistance of the combined earthing system.

9.4 SWITCHBOARDS / MCC / DISTRIBUTION BOARD / PANELS

a) Measurement of insulation Resistance of Bus-bar System.

b) Measurement of I. R. of Control Circuit.

c) Functional check of circuit components

d) Continuity check of different circuits.

e) Calibration test of Relays and Meters.

f) Space heater operation.

g) Annunciations.

9.5 RELAYS & METERS

a) Calibration test.

b) Operation I performance test.

NOTE

Tests required for some of the major items are indicated for Bidder's reference. Apart from thetests listed herein and also as mentioned elsewhere in this specification, any other test asnecessary per relevant standards, recommendations, Code of Practice, Manufacturer'srecommendations etc., shall have to be carried out by the Contractor without any implicationwithin the quoted price and time schedules.


170

LIGHTING FIXTURES AND FANS

(i) The lighting fixtures and fans shall be assembled and installed in position complete andready for service in accordance with the details drawings, manufacturer's instructionsand to the satisfaction of the Architect/consultant. Fixtures shall be suspended trueto alignment plumb level and capable of resisting all lateral and vertical forces and shallbe fixed as required.

All ceiling fans shall be provided with suspension arrangement in the concrete slab/roofmembers. It is the duty of the contractor to make these provisions at the appropriatestage of construction. Exhaust fans shall be fixed at locations shown on the drawings.All switch and outlet boxes, fan and light fittings shall be bonded to earth throughconnector blocks. Wires brought out from junction boxes shall be encased in GI flexiblepipes for connecting to fixtures concealed in suspended ceiling.

All lighting fixtures and fans shall be supplied as per the make and catalogue numbersmentioned in the bill of quantities or drawings in the original packing along with allstandard accessories & control gears as per manufacturers specifications against thatitem number. All fans and exhaust fans shall also be provided with the guarantee orwarrantee cards as the case may be.

(ii) a) Lighting fittings :- Lights, fans and socket outlet shall be so located as toprovide maximum comfort to the occupant and to enable him to utilise the electricity inthe most economical manner. Every lighting fitting shall be controlled by a switch whichshall be in live conductor of the circuit. Where control of the fitting at more than one pointis necessary. It shall be done by as many two way and intermediate switches as thereare control points.

b) Fittings Wire :- These wires shall be of copper and shall be used onlyfor internal wiring of fittings and shall be carried up to the termination of the light point.

c) Fluorescent tube fittings :- These fittings shall be high power factor type i.e.shall consist of necessary power factor improvement capacitor. The fittings shall bestandard models complete with necessary number of tubes. These shall be complete withall components supplied as original components with standard models and shall beassembled and wired by the manufactured at the factory. The fluorescent tube shall be ofthe same make as the fitting. In cases where tubes are not manufactured by the fittings,manufactures the fluorescent tube of any approved make as directed by the Engineer-in-charge shall be used.

d) High Pressure mercury / sodium vapour lamps :- These fittings shall becomplete with necessary vapour lamp, lamp holder, fittings with reflector, condensor,choke and starter etc. of appropriate size and quality complete in all respects with electricconnections.


171

(iii) CEILING FANS :-

a) ceiling fans including their suspension shall conform to relevant IndianStandards.

b) All ceiling fans shall be wired to ceiling roses or to special connector boxes, andsuspended from hooks or shackles, with insulators between hooks andsuspension rods. There shall be no joint in the suspension rod.

c) For existing concrete roofs, a 12 mm dia. MS rod in the shape of ‘U’ with theirvertical legs bent horizontally at the top at least 19 cm on either side, and boundto the top reinforcement of the roof shall be used.

d) The leading in wire shall be of nominal cross sectional area not less than 1.5 sq.mm. And shall be protected from abrasion.

e) Unless otherwise specified, all ceiling fans shall be hung 2.75 m above the floor.

f) In the case of measurement of extra down rod for ceiling fan including wiring, thesame shall be measured in units of 10 cm. Any length less than 5 cm shall beignored.

g) The wiring of extra down rod shall be paid as supplying and drawing cable inexisting conduit.

(iv) EXHAUST FANS :-

a) Exhaust fans shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.

b) Exhaust fans shall be erected at the places indicating by the Engineer-in-charge.Exhaust fan may be fixed in a window panel provided for this purpose or inmasonry. For fixing an exhaust fan in masonry a circular hole shall be provided inthe wall to suit the size of the frame, which shall be fixed by means of rag boltsembedded in the wall. The hole shall be neatly plastered to the original finish ofthe wall. The exhaust fan shall be connected to the exhaust fan point, which shallbe wired as near to the hole as possible, by means of a flexible cord, care beingtaken to see that the blades rotate in the proper direction.

c) Exhaust fans for installation in corrosive atmosphere, shall be painted withspecial PVC paint or chlorinated rubber paint.

d) Installation of exhaust fans in kitchens, dark rooms and such other speciallocations need careful consideration; any special provisions needed shall bespecified.


172

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES / BRANDS / AGENCIES

The Owner/Consultant reserves the right to select any of the brands indicated in the list of approved makeswithout any extra claim from the contractor. Following makes/ brands are also approved in addition to thosementioned in the item of works as described in BOQ & Specifications.

1. CIVIL WORKS

SL.No. ITEM MAKE

1 GREY CEMENT ACC, LARSEN & TOUBRO, GUJARAT AMBUJA, J.K, BIRLA;ULTRA TECH, JAYPEE.

2 WHITE CEMENT JK, BIRLA, WHITE3 WALL PUTTY BIRLA, J.K

4 REINFORCEMENT/STRUCTURALSTEEL SAIL, TATA STEEL , TISCO, RATHI UDYOG,.

5 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT PEST CONTROL INDIA LTD, PEST CON INDIA, PESTCONTROL INCORPORATED.

6 CONCRETE ADDITIVE KRYTON, CICO, FAIRMATE, PIDILITE7 FLUSH DOOR/ SHUTTERS GREEN, DURO, CENTURY, GODREJ, MAYUR.

8 PLYWOOD / BLOCK BOARD /SOFT BOARD DURO, GREEN, CENTURY, MAYUR.

9 PRELAMINATED PARTICLEBOARD NOVAPAN, ANCHOR, GREEN LAM, MAYUR.

10 LAMINATES CENTURY, GREEN LAM, DURO, EURO, MAYUR.11 ADHESIVE FOR WOOD WORK DUNLOP, FEVICOL, VAMICOL, PIDILITE.12 POLYRETHANE SEALANT KRYTON, PIDLITE, FAREMATE,

13 POLYETHELENE BOARD/ BACKUP ROD DUTRON SUPREME INDUSTRIES.

14 ALUMINIUM SECTIONS JINDAL, HINDALCO, INDAL, INDOALUSIS (MAHAVIR.)15 STAINLESS STEEL OZONE, DORMA.16 EXPANSION/ FASTNERS FISHER, HILTI, ANCHOR

17 FLOAT GLASS/ TOUGHENEDGLASS SAINT GOBAIN, AIS GLASS.

18 CERAMIC TILES SOMANY, KAZARIA,. VARMORA19 VITRIFIED PORCELINE TILES KAJARIA, VARMORA, SOMANY.

20 INTERLOCK TILES/GRASS PAVERBLOCKS NIMCO PREFAB, UNISTONE, MODERN.

21 TERRAZZO TILES NITCO, MODERN, HINDUSTAN.

22 CEMENT CONCRETE TILES ULTRA, EUROCON, NITCO, DURACRETE.

23 SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINTS BERGER (LUXOL GOLD), ASIAN (APCOLITE), ICI DULUX(GLOSS)

24 OIL BOUND DISTEMPER ASIAN (TRACTOR), BERGER (BISON), NEROLAC.

25 CEMENT PAINT SNOWEEM PLUS, BERGER (DUROCEM EXTRA),ULTRATECH

26 PLASTIC EMULSION PAINT ICI, ASIAN, MAS PAINT (ULTRATECH), NEROLAC.27 OTHER PAINTS/PRIMERS ICI DULUX, ASIAN, BERGER, NEROLAC, ULTRATECH28 PAINT BERGER, ASIAN PAINTS, ICI, ULTRATECH, NEROLAC.


173

29 SURFACE TEXTURE ULTRATECH, HERITAGE, SPECTRUM

30 DOOR/ WINDOWS /PATCHFITTINGS EBCO, GODREJ, HETTICH, DORMA, OZONE.

31 LOCKS EBCO, GODREJ, HARRISON.32 WARDROBE/ CUBBOARDS EBCO, GODREJ, HETTICH

33 NON METALLIC HARDENERCOMPOUND CICO, RECRON, FAIRMATE.

34 POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT PIDLITE, FORROC.35 PAVEMENT TILES PAVIT, ASIAN, ULTRA DESIGNER TILES37 MS PIPE JINDAL (HISAR), PRAKASH, SURYA.38 LAMINATION GREENLAM , EURO ,CENTURY39 HINGES DORMA,GARG,HETICH40 DOOR CLOSER DORMA, INDOBRASS41 FALSE CEILING ARMSTONG, DAIKEN

42 POLYCORBONATE ROOFSHEETING GE, DANPALON

43 SHEET ROOFING TATA BLUESCOPE.44 GLASS MOSAIC TILE CORAL, BISAZZA.

45 FRP DOORS FIBERWYS TECHNOLOGY / PLYMOLDS/ECHONINDUSTRIES LIMITED / SYNTAX


174

2. PLUMBING WORKS:

S.NO.

DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER'S NAME

1. VITREOUS CHINA SANITARYWARES PARRYWARE / CERA / HINDUSTAN

2. C. P. FITTINGS / MIXTURES JAQUAR / MARC

3. URINAL / W C FLUSHING SYSTEM JAQUAR / MARC

4. FIRE CLAY SINK SANFIRE / JOHNSON PEDDER

5. STAINLESS STEEL SINK NIRALI / PARRY / FRANKE

6. BALL VALVES / NRV / STRAINER / PRV CIM / LEADER / AUDCO / ZOLOTO / FESTO /ADVANCE / AIP

7. G.I.PIPES - IS : 1239 JINDAL (Hissar) / Bharat / Prakash Surya

8. G.I.FITTINGS - IS : 1239 UNCO / R BRAND / UNIK / ZOLOTO

9. S.W.PIPES / GULLY TRAPS - IS : 651 BURN / PERFECT OR I. S. I. MARKED

10. EWC PLASTIC SEAT COVERS PARRYWARE / CERA / HINDUSTAN /COMMANDER

11. PVC LOW LEVEL FLUSHING CISTERN PARRY - SLIM LINE / HINDUSTAN / CERA

12. OVER HEAD TANKS SINTEX / ATUL

13. S S FLOOR GRATING / FLOOR CLEAN OUT CHILLY / Hightech

14. S S LIQUID SOAP DISPENSOR / HANDDRIER

IMPULSE / TOSHI / UTEC

15. UPVC Soil/waste/rain water pipes and fittings -IS:13592

SUPREME / PRINCE / FINOLEX

16. UPVC water supply pipes and fittings - IS:4985 SUPREME / PRINCE / FINOLEX

17. CPVC water supply pipes and fittings ASTRAL / AJAY

18. PVC sch 40 / 80 water supply pipes and fittings ASTRAL / AJAY / Supreme

19. WATER LEVEL INDICATOR / Level controllers Elegant / Unison / Technika / Sigma

20.

21. Anchor Fastener / U clamp / Pipehangers

Hilti / Intello Tech / Chilli / Hightech / Fisher

22 R.O.Plant BRISANZIA / ENWECO / AQUA GREENWATER.

23. ANY OTHER ITEMS ON APPROVAL OF ARCHITECT /CONSULTANT OR ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE


175

3. ELECTRICAL WORKS:

S.NO. DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER'S NAME

1. MCB / RCCB / RCBO / DB L&T (Hager) / ABB / LEGRAND (Lexic) / HPL/Schneider (M9)

2. Industrial outlet L&T (Hager) / ABB / LEGRAND (Lexic) / HPL/Schneider (M9)

3. MCCB (Medium) ABB (TMA) / L & T (D sine / DNX) / Schnieder(Compact) / Siemens (VL) / Legrand/HPL

4. MCCB (Economical) ABB (TMD) / L & T (DH) / Schnieder (NS) /Siemens (VT)/HPL

5. SWITCH FUSE UNIT WITH HRC FUSES L. & T. / ABB / Schnieder / Siemens

6. CONTACTORS / RELAYS L & T / SIEMENS / ABB / Schneider

7. Current Transformers Kappa / Pragati / AE / G&M

8. Voltage Transformers Kappa / G & M / AE

9. Ammeters / Voltmeters and meteringequipments

L & T / SIEMENS / Automatic Electric / Neptune /enercon

10. Selector Switches Kaycee / Salzar / L&T

11. LED lights L&T / Vaishno/Philips/HPL/Bajaj

12. Change Over Switches GE / L&T / HH ELCON / ABB

13. PVC insulated Copper conductor wires FINOLEX / RR / RPG / Polycab / Rallison /Bonton / Batra Henley

14. Telephone Wires and cables FINOLEX / RR / RPG / Polycab / Bonton / HPL

15. Television Coaxial cable FINOLEX / RR / RPG / Polycab / Bonton / HPL

16. Switchs and Sockets outlets (Conventionalpiano type)

ANCHOR / SSK /HPL

17. Switchs and Sockets outlets (Modular type) Clipsal (Opal) / MK (wraparound) / Legrand(Mosaic) / ABB / Siemens / Crabtree (Piccadly) /Wipro (North West)/HPL

18. PVC / XLPE INSULATED 11 KV / 1.1 KVCABLES

FORT GLOSTER / NICCO / RPG / FINOLEX /POLYCAB / RALLISON

19. CONTROL CABLES / WIRES FORT GLOSTER / NICCO / RPG / FINOLEX /POLYCAB / RALLISON

20. H.V. CABLE TERMINAL JOINTS RAYCHEM / 3 M / Mseal

21. LUGS DOWELLS / 3D / C.C.I. / 3 M

22. PVC Conduits and accessories AKG / BEC / CAP / SEIKO / POLY PACK


176

23. Fluorescent Tube Fitting PHILIPS / WIPRO / SHEREDER / HPL

24. Incandescent Light Fitting DECON / ANKUR / WIPRO

25. HPMV / HPSV / Halogen Lamp Fitting PHILIPS / WIPRO / SHEREDER

26. Ceiling Fans / Exhaust Fans / AirCirculators

CROMPTON / BAJAJ / USHA / ALMONARD /HAVELLS

26. Solar System BAJAJ / TATA POWR SOLAR (VeenaEnterprises) / PRIMO TECH

28. Any Other Items On approval of consultant or Engg in charge

Note for all makes:

1. Wherever makes have not been specified for certain terms as equivalent makes referred,the same shall be as per BIS and as per approved by Engineer- in-charge / Consultant.

2. Contractor shall be required to get the finishing items/products approved in respect oftheir make, finish, texture, color & such parameters, which are essential.

3. The samples or Cat. No. of all type of items should be approved before execution.

construction of toilet blocks, drinking water facility and access … · 2018-03-01 ·...

Documents